manualshive.com logo in svg

GE Multilin L60, Инструкция по эксплуатации

У нас есть бесплатное руководство пользователя и установки для продукта N1C L60. Вы можете скачать его с нашего сайта manualshive.com. Получите подробные инструкции по использованию и установке этого товара, чтобы сделать процесс еще проще и удобнее.

Поделиться
Скачать
background image

GE Multilin

L60 Line Phase Comparison System

5-271

5 SETTINGS

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5

Consider the following configuration:

The source 1 (SRC1) phase currents are CTs and phase voltages are bus VTs. The source 2 (SRC2) phase voltages are
line VTs. Contact input 1 is set as the breaker 52a contact (optional).

The conditions prior to flashover detection are:

1.

VA is greater than pickup

2.

IA, IB, IC = 0; no current flows through the breaker

3.

52a status = 0 (optional)

The conditions at flashover detection are:

1.

VA is less than pickup

2.

VAg, VBg, or VCg is lower than the pickup setting

3.

IA, IB, or IC is greater than the pickup current flowing through the breaker

4.

52a status = 0 (optional)

The element is operational only when phase-to-ground voltages are connected to relay terminals. The flashover
element will not operate if delta voltages are applied.

The breaker flashover settings are described below.

•

BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1 SRC

: This setting specifies a signal source used to provide three-phase voltages and three-

phase currents from one side of the current breaker. The source selected as a setting and must be configured with
breaker phase voltages and currents, even if only three (3) VTs are available across the breaker.

•

BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC

: This setting specifies a signal source used to provide another set of three phase volt-

ages whenever six (6) VTs are available across the breaker.

•

BRK 1 STATUS CLSD A

 to 

BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C

: These settings specify FlexLogic operands to indicate the open

status of the breaker. A separate FlexLogic operand can be selected to detect individual breaker pole status and pro-
vide flashover detection. The recommended setting is 52a breaker contact or another operand defining the breaker
poles open status.

•

BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP

: This setting specifies a pickup level for the phase voltages from both sides of the breaker. If

six VTs are available, opening the breaker leads to two possible combinations – live voltages from only one side of the
breaker, or live voltages from both sides of the breaker. Either case will set the scheme ready for flashover detection
upon detection of voltage above the selected value. Set 

BRK FLSHOVR V PKP

 to 85 to 90% of the nominal voltage.

•

BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP

: This setting specifies a pickup level for the phase voltage difference when two VTs per

phase are available across the breaker. The pickup voltage difference should be below the monitored voltage differ-
ence when close or open breaker resistors are left in service. The setting is selected as primary volts difference
between the sources.

•

BRK 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP

: This setting specifies the normal load current which can flow through the breaker.

Depending on the flashover protection application, the flashover current can vary from levels of the charging current
when the line is de-energized (all line breakers open), to well above the maximum line (feeder) load (line/feeder con-
nected to load).

842745A1.CDR

VTs

VTs

Line/Feeder

Breaker

CTs

Bus

NOTE

Содержание L60

Страница 1: ... AA2 GEK 119563A GE Digital Energy 650 Markland Street Markham Ontario Canada L6C 0M1 Tel 1 905 927 7070 Fax 1 905 927 5098 Internet http www GEDigitalEnergy com GE Multilin s Quality Management System is registered to ISO 9001 2008 QMI 005094 UL A3775 1601 0082 AA2 GE Digital Energy LISTED 52TL IND CONT EQ E83849 ...

Страница 2: ...Digital Energy Multilin and GE Multilin are trademarks or registered trademarks of GE Multilin Inc The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc This documentation is furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission of GE Multilin The content of this manual is for informational use only and is subject to change without notice Part number 1...

Страница 3: ... 1 18 1 5 2 MENU NAVIGATION 1 18 1 5 3 MENU HIERARCHY 1 18 1 5 4 RELAY ACTIVATION 1 19 1 5 5 RELAY PASSWORDS 1 19 1 5 6 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION 1 19 1 5 7 COMMISSIONING 1 20 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 1 INTRODUCTION 2 1 1 OVERVIEW 2 1 2 1 2 SECURITY 2 4 2 1 3 IEC 870 5 103 PROTOCOL 2 8 2 2 ORDER CODES 2 2 1 ORDER CODES 2 10 2 2 2 REPLACEMENT MODULES 2 12 2 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 3 1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS 2...

Страница 4: ...D ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4 2 1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES 4 4 4 2 2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS 4 8 4 2 3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY 4 10 4 3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 3 1 FACEPLATE 4 13 4 3 2 LED INDICATORS 4 14 4 3 3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS 4 17 4 3 4 DISPLAY 4 23 4 3 5 KEYPAD 4 23 4 3 6 BREAKER CONTROL 4 24 4 3 7 MENUS 4 25 4 3 8 CHANGING SETTINGS 4 27 5 SETTINGS 5 1 OVERVIEW 5 1 1 SETTIN...

Страница 5: ... 5 215 5 5 12 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT 5 217 5 5 13 BREAKER FAILURE 5 224 5 5 14 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5 233 5 6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 6 1 OVERVIEW 5 241 5 6 2 TRIP BUS 5 241 5 6 3 SETTING GROUPS 5 243 5 6 4 SELECTOR SWITCH 5 245 5 6 5 TRIP OUTPUT 5 251 5 6 6 SYNCHROCHECK 5 257 5 6 7 DIGITAL ELEMENTS 5 261 5 6 8 DIGITAL COUNTERS 5 264 5 6 9 MONITORING ELEMENTS 5 266 5 6 10 PILOT SCHEMES 5 285 5 6 11 AUTO...

Страница 6: ...N CHANNEL TESTS 6 9 6 2 19 REMAINING CONNECTION STATUS 6 10 6 2 20 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL PRP 6 10 6 3 METERING 6 3 1 METERING CONVENTIONS 6 12 6 3 2 SOURCES 6 15 6 3 3 SYNCHROCHECK 6 18 6 3 4 TRACKING FREQUENCY 6 18 6 3 5 FLEXELEMENTS 6 19 6 3 6 IEC 61580 GOOSE ANALOG VALUES 6 19 6 3 7 WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 6 20 6 3 8 TRANSDUCER INPUTS OUTPUTS 6 20 6 3 9 DISTANCE 6 20 6 4 RECORDS 6 4 1 FA...

Страница 7: ...NT 87PC 9 1 1 DESCRIPTION 9 1 9 1 2 USE OF SETTINGS 9 1 9 1 3 SETTINGS EXAMPLE 9 3 9 2 DISTANCE BACKUP SUPERVISION 9 2 1 DESCRIPTION 9 4 9 2 2 LINES WITH TAPPED TRANSFORMERS 9 5 9 2 3 TRANSFORMER LOAD CURRENTS 9 5 9 2 4 LV SIDE FAULTS 9 5 9 2 5 TRANSFORMER INRUSH CURRENT 9 5 9 2 6 TRACTIONAL LOAD 9 6 9 2 7 SENSITIVITY ISSUES 9 7 9 2 8 SINGLE POLE TRIPPING APPLICATIONS 9 8 9 2 9 PHASE DISTANCE 9 9 ...

Страница 8: ...ANALOG MEASURED VALUES C 2 C 2 6 MMXU ANALOG MEASURED VALUES C 3 C 2 7 PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES C 3 C 3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION C 3 1 BUFFERED UNBUFFERED REPORTING C 5 C 3 2 FILE TRANSFER C 5 C 3 3 TIMESTAMPS AND SCANNING C 5 C 3 4 LOGICAL DEVICE NAME C 5 C 3 5 LOCATION C 5 C 3 6 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES C 6 C 3 7 CONNECTION TIMING C 6 C 3 8 NON IEC 61850 DATA C 6 C 3 9 COMMU...

Страница 9: ... 9 F DNP COMMUNICATIONS F 1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT F 1 1 DNP V3 00 DEVICE PROFILE F 1 F 1 2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE F 4 F 2 DNP POINT LISTS F 2 1 BINARY INPUT POINTS F 8 F 2 2 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT F 9 F 2 3 COUNTERS F 10 F 2 4 ANALOG INPUTS F 11 G RADIUS SERVER G 1 RADIUS SERVER CONFIGURATION G 1 1 RADIUS SERVER CONFIGURATION G 1 H MISCELLANEOUS H 1 CHANGE NOTES H 1 1 REVISION HISTORY H 1...

Страница 10: ...x L60 Line Phase Comparison System GE Multilin TABLE OF CONTENTS ...

Страница 11: ...limits Only qualified personnel are to operate the device Such personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all safety cau tions and warnings in this manual and with applicable country regional utility and plant safety regulations Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the device connection to current transformers voltage transformers control and test circuit terminals Make sure all...

Страница 12: ...ND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT GE Digital Energy 650 Markland Street Markham Ontario Canada L6C 0M1 TELEPHONE Worldwide 1 905 927 7070 Europe Middle East Africa 34 94 485 88 54 North America toll free 1 800 547 8629 FAX 1 905 927 5098 E MAIL Worldwide multilin tech ge com Europe multilin tech euro ge com HOME PAGE http www gedigitalenergy com multilin For updates to the instruction manual firm...

Страница 13: ...YPES The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard wired contacts Both wet and dry contacts are supported The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR series internal logic signals Virtual inputs include signals generated by the local user interface The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to customize the device ...

Страница 14: ...the use of objects and classes An object is defined as a logical entity that contains both data and code that manipulates data A class is the generalized form of similar objects By using this approach one can create a protection class with the protection elements as objects of the class such as time overcurrent instantaneous overcurrent current differential undervoltage overvoltage underfrequency ...

Страница 15: ... DVD drive The following qualified modems have been tested to be compatible with the L60 and the EnerVista UR Setup software US Robotics external 56K FaxModem 5686 US Robotics external Sportster 56K X2 PCTEL 2304WT V 92 MDC internal modem 1 3 2 INSTALLATION After ensuring that the requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup software are met install the software from the GE EnerVista DVD Or download ...

Страница 16: ... The UR device is added to the list of installed intelligent electronic devices IEDs in the EnerVista Launchpad window as shown Figure 1 5 UR DEVICE ADDED TO LAUNCHPAD WINDOW 1 3 3 CONFIGURING THE L60 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS a OVERVIEW You connect remotely to the L60 through the rear RS485 or Ethernet port with a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software The L60 can also be accessed locally wit...

Страница 17: ...tton then select the new site to re open the Device Setup window 6 Click the Add Device button to define the new device 7 Enter a name in the Device Name field and a description optional of the site 8 Select Serial from the Interface drop down list This displays a number of interface parameters that must be entered for serial communications Figure 1 6 CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS 9 Enter the ...

Страница 18: ...Setup window 16 Click the Add Device button to define the new device 17 Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description optional of the site 18 Select Ethernet from the Interface drop down list This displays a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet functionality Figure 1 7 CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS 19 Enter the relay IP address specified...

Страница 19: ... click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communi cations to the L60 device This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the L60 model num ber b USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE REAR ETHERNET PORTS To use the Quick Connect feature to access the L60 from a computer through Ethernet first assign an IP address to the relay from the front panel keyboard 1 Press the M...

Страница 20: ...indows desktop right click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network con nections window 2 Right click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties 3 Select the Internet Protocol TCP IP item from the list and click the Properties button 4 Click the Use the following IP address box ...

Страница 21: ... time and TTL vary depending on local network configuration 5 If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C WINNT ping 1 1 1 1 command Pinging 1 1 1 1 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Ping statistics for 1 1 1 1 Packets Sent 4 Received 0 Lost 4 100 loss Approximate round trip time in milliseconds Minimum 0ms Maximum 0...

Страница 22: ...nnection specific DNS suffix IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS suffix IP Address 1 1 1 2 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway C WINNT Before using the Quick Connect feature through the Ethernet port disable any configured proxy settings in Internet Explorer 1 Start the Internet Explorer software 2 Select the Tools...

Страница 23: ... the Windows desktop right click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network con nections window 2 Right click the Local Area Connection icon and select the Properties item 3 Select the Internet Protocol TCP IP item from the list provided and click the Properties button 4 Set the computer to Obtain a relay address automatically as shown If this computer is used to connect ...

Страница 24: ...s can now be edited printed or changed See chapter 4 in this manual or the EnerVista UR Setup Help File for information about the using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface QUICK ACTION HOT LINKS The EnerVista UR Setup software has several quick action buttons to provide instant access to several functions that are often performed when using L60 relays From the online window users can select ...

Страница 25: ...thentication can be chosen on the login screen but the choice is available only in EnerVista Use device authentication to log in using the five pre configured roles Administrator Supervisor Engineer Operator Observer When using a serial connection only device authentication is supported When server authentication is required characteristics for communication with a RADIUS server must be configured...

Страница 26: ...sing EnerVista navigate to Settings Product Setup Security Change the Local Administrator Password for example It is strongly recommended that the password for the Administrator be changed from the default Changing the passwords for the other three roles is optional Figure 1 10 CHANGING THE DEFAULT PASSWORD ...

Страница 27: ...erial cable A shielded twisted pair 20 22 or 24 AWG connects the F485 converter to the L60 rear communications port The converter terminals GND are connected to the L60 communication module COM terminals See the CPU Communica tion Ports section in chapter 3 for details The line is terminated with an R C network that is 120 1 nF as described in the chapter 3 1 4 3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY All messages are...

Страница 28: ...then then 0 then then 0 then then 1 To save the address press the ENTER key 1 5 2 MENU NAVIGATION Press the MENU key to select a header display page top level menu The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading pages Actual values Settings Commands Targets User displays when enabled 1 5 3 MENU ...

Страница 29: ...assigned to specific personnel There are two user security access levels COMMAND and SETTING 1 COMMAND The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes but allows the user to perform the fol lowing operations Operate breakers via faceplate keypad Change state of virtual inputs Clear event records Clear oscillography records Operate user programmable pushbuttons 2 SETTIN...

Страница 30: ...cations 3 LED test 4 Visual inspection for any damage corrosion dust or loose wires 5 Event recorder file download with further events analysis Out of service maintenance 1 Check wiring connections for firmness 2 Analog values currents voltages RTDs analog inputs injection test and metering accuracy verification Calibrated test equipment is required 3 Protection elements setting verification analo...

Страница 31: ... detector VT fuse failure detector breaker arcing current disturbance detector and continuous monitor Diagnostic features include an event recorder capable of storing 1024 time tagged events oscillography capable of storing up to 64 records with programmable trigger content and sampling rate and data logger acquisition of up to 16 channels with programmable content and sampling rate The internal c...

Страница 32: ...using ANSI American National Standards Institute device numbers TYPICAL 2 TERMINAL APPLICATION TYPICAL 3 TERMINAL APPLICATION 831788A1 CDR L60 1 CH1 5a 5b 5c BATT Tx1P Tx1N 6a 6b 6c BATT Rx1P Rx1N L60 2 CH1 5a 5b 5c BATT Tx1P Tx1N 6a 6b 6c BATT Rx1P Rx1N L60 3 CH1 5a 5b 5c BATT Tx1P Tx1N 6a 6b 6c BATT Rx1P Rx1N PLC PLC PLC PLC L60 1 CH1 SECOND CHANNEL FOR DUAL COMPARISON PLC 5a 5b 5c BATT Tx1P Tx1...

Страница 33: ...ence overvoltage 50DD Disturbance detector 67N Neutral directional overcurrent 50G Ground instantaneous overcurrent 67P Phase directional overcurrent 50N Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 67_2 Negative sequence directional overcurrent 50P Phase instantaneous overcurrent 68 Power swing blocking 50_2 Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent 78 Out of step tripping 51G Ground time overcurrent 79 A...

Страница 34: ...Basic password or enhanced CyberSentry security applies depending on purchase b PASSWORD SECURITY Password security is a basic security feature present in the default offering of the product Two levels of password security are provided command and setting The following operations are under command password supervision Operating the breakers via faceplate keypad Changing the state of virtual inputs...

Страница 35: ...Event Recorder c CYBERSENTRY SECURITY CyberSentry Embedded Security is a software option that provides advanced security services When this option is pur chased the basic password security is disabled automatically CyberSentry provides security through the following features An Authentication Authorization Accounting AAA Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS client that is centrally ma...

Страница 36: ...d on the UR device As such when using the local accounts access is not user attribut able In cases where user attributable access is required especially to facilitate auditable processes for compliance reasons use RADIUS authentication only When the Server Authentication Type option is selected the UR uses the RADIUS server and not its local authentication database to authenticate the user No pass...

Страница 37: ... System Setup RW RW R R R FlexLogic RW RW R R R Grouped Elements RW RW R R R Control Elements RW RW R R R Inputs Outputs RW RW R R R Contact Input RW RW R R R Contact Input thresh old RW RW R R R Virtual Inputs RW RW R R R Contact Output RW RW R R R Virtual Output RW RW R R R Remote Devices RW RW R R R Remote Inputs RW RW R R R Remote DPS input RW RW R R R Remote Output DNA Bit Pair RW RW R R R Re...

Страница 38: ...f standards for transmission protocols It defines messages and procedures for interoperability between protection equipment and devices of a control system in a substation for communi cating on a serial line The IEC 60870 5 103 is an unbalanced master slave protocol for coded bit serial communication exchanging information with a control system In the context of this protocol the protection equipm...

Страница 39: ...GE Multilin L60 Line Phase Comparison System 2 9 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 1 INTRODUCTION 2 Commands Time synchronization The RS485 port supports IEC 60870 5 103 ...

Страница 40: ...anel with English display and user programmable pushbuttons N Enhanced front panel with French display and user programmable pushbuttons T Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user programmable pushbuttons V Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user programmable pushbuttons W Enhanced front panel with Turkish display Y Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user programmab...

Страница 41: ... with French display and user programmable pushbuttons T Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user programmable pushbuttons V Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user programmable pushbuttons W Enhanced front panel with Turkish display Y Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user programmable pushbuttons I Enhanced front panel with German display J Enhanced front panel w...

Страница 42: ...nt panel with French display 3Q Enhanced front panel with Russian display 3U Enhanced front panel with Chinese display 3L Enhanced front panel with English display and user programmable pushbuttons 3N Enhanced front panel with French display and user programmable pushbuttons 3T Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user programmable pushbuttons 3V Enhanced front panel with Chinese display ...

Страница 43: ...ing outputs 67 8 Form A no monitoring outputs 6A 2 Form A voltage with optional current and 2 Form C outputs 8 contact inputs 6B 2 Form A voltage with optional current and 4 Form C outputs 4 contact inputs 6C 8 Form C outputs 6D 16 contact inputs 6E 4 Form C outputs 8 contact inputs 6F 8 Fast Form C outputs 6G 4 Form A voltage with optional current outputs 8 contact inputs 6H 6 Form A voltage with...

Страница 44: ...s in steps of 0 1 Channel delay adjustment 0 000 to 30 00 ms in steps of 0 001 Channel adjustments channel delay and signal symmetry com pensation Operate time typical cycle for single phase comparison cycle for dual phase comparison Trip security first coincidence or enhanced Second coincidence timer 10 to 200 ms in steps of 1 Enhanced stability angle 40 to 180 in steps of 1 Charging current comp...

Страница 45: ...les in steps of 1 Voltage supervision pickup series compensation applications 0 to 5 000 pu in steps of 0 001 Operation time 1 to 1 5 cycles typical Reset time 1 power cycle typical LINE PICKUP Phase instantaneous overcurrent 0 000 to 30 000 pu Undervoltage pickup 0 000 to 3 000 pu Overvoltage delay 0 000 to 65 535 s PHASE NEUTRAL GROUND TOC Current Phasor or RMS Pickup level 0 000 to 30 000 pu in...

Страница 46: ... operands Tripping reverse load forward fault 12 ms typically Blocking forward load reverse fault 8 ms typically NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT Directionality Co existing forward and reverse Polarizing Voltage Current Dual Dual V Dual I Polarizing voltage V_0 or VX Polarizing current IG Operating current I_0 Level sensing 3 I_0 K I_1 IG Restraint K 0 000 to 0 500 in steps of 0 001 Characteristic ...

Страница 47: ...in steps of 0 01 Timer accuracy 3 of operate time or 1 4 cycle whichever is greater Operate time 30 ms at 1 10 pickup at 60 Hz NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE Pickup level 0 000 to 1 250 pu in steps of 0 001 Dropout level 97 to 98 of pickup Level accuracy 0 5 of reading from 10 to 208 V Pickup delay 0 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 Reset delay 0 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 Timer accuracy 3 of operate...

Страница 48: ...r is greater Operate time 30 ms at 60 Hz OPEN POLE DETECTOR Functionality Detects an open pole condition monitor ing breaker auxiliary contacts the cur rent in each phase and optional voltages on the line Current pickup level 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 Line capacitive reactances XC1 XC0 300 0 to 9999 9 sec in steps of 0 1 Remote current pickup level 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 C...

Страница 49: ...buttons 12 standard faceplate 16 enhanced faceplate Mode self reset latched Display message 2 lines of 20 characters each Drop out timer 0 00 to 60 00 s in steps of 0 05 Autoreset timer 0 2 to 600 0 s in steps of 0 1 Hold timer 0 0 to 10 0 s in steps of 0 1 SELECTOR SWITCH Number of elements 2 Upper position limit 1 to 7 in steps of 1 Selecting mode time out or acknowledge Time out timer 3 0 to 60...

Страница 50: ...OWER VA Accuracy at 0 1 to 1 5 x CT rating and 0 8 to 1 2 x VT rating 1 0 of reading WATT HOURS POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE Accuracy 2 0 of reading Range 0 to 1 106 MWh Parameters three phase only Update rate 50 ms VAR HOURS POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE Accuracy 2 0 of reading Range 0 to 1 106 Mvarh Parameters three phase only Update rate 50 ms FREQUENCY Accuracy at V 0 8 to 1 2 pu 0 01 Hz when voltage signal ...

Страница 51: ...s of 0 5 Continuous current draw 4 mA when energized Auto burnish impulse current 50 to 70 mA Duration of auto burnish impulse 25 to 50 ms DCMA INPUTS Current input mA DC 0 to 1 0 to 1 1 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 10 0 to 20 4 to 20 programmable Input impedance 379 10 Conversion range 1 to 20 mA DC Accuracy 0 2 of full scale Type Passive RTD INPUTS Types 3 wire 100 Platinum 100 120 Nickel 10 Copper Sensing ...

Страница 52: ...ak DC inductive L R 40 ms Operate time 4 ms Contact material silver alloy LATCHING RELAY Make and carry for 0 2 s 30 A as per ANSI C37 90 Carry continuous 6 A as per IEEE C37 90 Break DC resistive as per IEC61810 1 Operate time 4 ms Contact material silver alloy Control separate operate and reset inputs Control mode operate dominant or reset dominant FORM A VOLTAGE MONITOR Applicable voltage appro...

Страница 53: ...s RTU RS485 1 rear port Up to 115 kbps Modbus RTU DNP 3 IEC 60870 5 103 Typical distance 1200 m Isolation 2 kV isolated together at 36 Vpk ETHERNET FIBER ETHERNET 10 100 MB TWISTED PAIR Modes 10 MB 10 100 MB auto detect Connector RJ45 SIMPLE NETWORK TIME PROTOCOL SNTP clock synchronization error 10 ms typical PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL PTP PTP IEEE Std 1588 2008 version 2 Power Profile PP per IEEE St...

Страница 54: ... II Overvoltage category II Ingress protection IP20 front IP10 back INTERFACE TYPE TYPICAL DISTANCE RS422 1200 m G 703 100 m EMITTER FIBER TYPE TRANSMIT POWER RECEIVED SENSITIVITY POWER BUDGET 820 nm LED Multimode 20 dBm 30 dBm 10 dB 1300 nm LED Multimode 21 dBm 30 dBm 9 dB 1300 nm ELED Single mode 23 dBm 32 dBm 9 dB 1300 nm Laser Single mode 1 dBm 30 dBm 29 dB 1550 nm Laser Single mode 5 dBm 30 d...

Страница 55: ...ple DC IEC 60255 11 12 ripple 200 ms interrupts Radiated and conducted emissions CISPR11 CISPR22 IEC 60255 25 Class A Sinusoidal vibration IEC 60255 21 1 Class 1 Shock and bump IEC 60255 21 2 Class 1 Seismic IEC 60255 21 3 Class 1 Power magnetic immunity IEC 61000 4 8 Level 5 Pulse magnetic immunity IEC 61000 4 9 Level 4 Damped magnetic immunity IEC 61000 4 10 Level 4 Voltage dip and interruption ...

Страница 56: ...aning is not required but for situations where dust has accumulated on the faceplate display a dry cloth can be used To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors power up units that are stored in a de energized state once per year for one hour continuously COMPLIANCE APPLICABLE COUNCIL DIRECTIVE ACCORDING TO CE Low voltage directive EN 60255 5 EMC directive EN 60255 26 EN 50263 EN 61000 6 5 C...

Страница 57: ...GE Multilin L60 Line Phase Comparison System 2 27 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 ...

Страница 58: ...2 28 L60 Line Phase Comparison System GE Multilin 2 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 ...

Страница 59: ...the removable modules and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth The case dimensions are shown below along with panel cutout details for panel mounting When planning the location of your panel cutout ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits ...

Страница 60: ...ing When planning the location of your panel cutout ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi flush with the panel or switchgear door allowing the operator access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four scr...

Страница 61: ...8 243 4 mm 7 00 177 7 mm 4 00 101 6 mm 7 10 180 2 mm 13 66 347 0 mm 14 03 356 2 mm 0 20 5 1 mm 1 55 39 3 mm 4 Places 0 213 5 41 mm Front of Panel Mounting Bracket Vertical Enhanced Front View Vertical Enhanced Top View Vertical Enhanced Mounting Panel CUTOUT Front of Panel Reference only Terminal Blocks Front Bezel Front of Panel Mounting Bracket Vertical Enhanced Side View 843809A2 cdr ...

Страница 62: ...ertical UR series device GEK 113182 Connecting the side mounted UR V enhanced front panel to a vertically mounted horizontal UR series device For details on side mounting L60 devices with the standard front panel refer to the figures below 13 72 348 5 mm 7 00 177 8 mm 13 50 342 9 mm Front of panel Front bezel Panel Mounting bracket 1 57 39 9 mm 4 00 101 6 7 13 181 1 mm 0 46 11 7 mm 13 65 346 7 mm ...

Страница 63: ...GE Multilin L60 Line Phase Comparison System 3 5 3 HARDWARE 3 1 DESCRIPTION 3 Figure 3 6 L60 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING INSTALLATION STANDARD PANEL ...

Страница 64: ...NG REAR DIMENSIONS STANDARD PANEL C U T O U T 1 33 33 9 2 83 71 9 6 66 169 2 12 20 309 9 0 159 DIA 6 PLACES 4 0 0 213 DIA 5 4 4 PLACES SEE HOLES MARKED X INCHES MILLIMETERS 5 33 135 4 PANEL SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY VIEWED FROM FRONT X X X X 1 00 25 4 1 00 25 4 10 05 255 3 0 04 1 0 0 68 17 3 5 27 133 8 843753A3 cdr ...

Страница 65: ...n example of rear terminal assignments Figure 3 9 EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F AND H SLOTS X W V U T S P N M L K J H D G F B R 8 4 7 3 6 2 5 1 b 8 4 7 3 6 2 5 1 a a b c a b c a b c a b c Optional direct input output module CPU module T module shown Optional contact input output module CT VT module Power supply module Tx1 Tx2 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx2 831825A3 CDR a b c CT module with two comms channels Optional ...

Страница 66: ...INPUT S1c CONTACT INPUT S8a CONTACT INPUT S4a CONTACT INPUT S6a CONTACT INPUT S2a CONTACT INPUT S8c CONTACT INPUT S4c CONTACT INPUT S6c CONTACT INPUT S2c COMMON S7b COMMON S3b COMMON S5b COMMON S1b SURGE S8c S4c S7c S3c S8b RS 232 DB 9 front UR COMPUTER 1 TXD RXD RXD TXD SGND SGND 1 8 3 2 20 7 6 4 5 22 25 PIN CONNECTOR PERSONAL COMPUTER 9 PIN CONNECTOR 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 TC TC 2 1 VOL...

Страница 67: ...r for dry contact input connections The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay see the Typical wiring diagram earlier The critical failure relay is a form C device that is energized once control power is applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self test failures If on going self test diagnostic checks dete...

Страница 68: ... as the phase current input Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs Current transformers with 1 to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries can be used The above modules have enhanced diagnostics that can automatically...

Страница 69: ...nd the DC current through the output contact when it is closed Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose out put is set to logic On 1 when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting The voltage monitor is set to On 1 when there is a voltage across open contact the detector allows a current of about 1 to 2 5 mA and the current monitor is set to On 1 when the current flowin...

Страница 70: ...y con tinue to read the form A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened when measured as an impedance The solution is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set and connect the form A contact through a voltage dropping resistor to a DC voltage source If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is used as a source a 500 10 W resistor is appropriate In ...

Страница 71: ... 6a 6c 2 Inputs 6 Fast Form C 6a 6c 2 Inputs 6 Form A 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7 Fast Form C 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7a 7c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8 Fast Form C 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 6K MODULE 6L MODULE 6M MODULE 6N MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT OR INPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT OR INPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT OR INPUT 1 Form C 1 Form A 1 Form A 1 Form A 2 Form C 2 Form A...

Страница 72: ...6 Solid State 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7 Form A 7 Not Used 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8 Form A 8 Solid State 4B MODULE 4C MODULE 4D MODULE 4L MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT 1 Not Used 1 Not Used 1a 1c 2 Inputs 1 2 Outputs 2 Solid State 2 Solid State 2a 2c 2 Inputs 2 2 Outputs 3 Not Used 3 Not Used 3a 3c 2 I...

Страница 73: ...GE Multilin L60 Line Phase Comparison System 3 15 3 HARDWARE 3 2 WIRING 3 Figure 3 14 CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING 1 of 2 842762A3 CDR ...

Страница 74: ...N 8c COMMON 7b SURGE 8c 7c 8b I V I V I V I V DIGITAL I O 6N 1b 2b 3b 4b 6c 1a 2a 3a 4a 5a 6a 1c 2c 3c 4c 5c 5b 1 2 3 4 8a 7b 7a CONTACT IN 7a CONTACT IN 5a CONTACT IN 7c CONTACT IN 5c CONTACT IN 8a CONTACT IN 6a CONTACT IN 8c CONTACT IN 6c COMMON 7b COMMON 5b SURGE 8c 7c 8b DIGITAL I O 6T 1b 2b 3b 4b 6c 1a 2a 3a 4a 5a 6a 1c 2c 3c 4c 5c 5b 1 2 3 4 8a 7b 7a CONTACT IN 7a CONTACT IN 5a CONTACT IN 7c...

Страница 75: ...each contact group The maximum external source voltage for this arrangement is 300 V DC The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs detects a closed contact input is programmable as 17 V DC for 24 V sources 33 V DC for 48 V sources 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources and 166 V DC for 250 V sources Figure 3 16 DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS Wherever a tilde symbol appears s...

Страница 76: ...uto burnishing allow currents up to 50 to 70 mA at the first instance when the change of state was sensed Then within 25 to 50 ms this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated above The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the con tacts allowing for proper sensing of state changes If the external device contact is bouncing the auto burnishing starts when external device contact bouncin...

Страница 77: ... output module has a total of 24 terminal connections These connections are arranged as three ter minals per row with a total of eight rows A given row can be used for either inputs or outputs with terminals in column a having positive polarity and terminals in column c having negative polarity Since an entire row is used for a single input output channel the name of the channel is assigned using ...

Страница 78: ...Setup software provided with the relay Cabling for the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9 pin and 25 pin connectors The baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps Figure 3 21 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION Three wire shielded cable RTD terminals Maximum total lead resistance 25 ohms for Platinum RTDs Route cable in separate conduit from current carrying conductors RTD 85973...

Страница 79: ...d together Though data is transmitted over a two wire twisted pair all RS485 devices require a shared reference or common voltage This common voltage is implied to be a power supply common Some systems allow the shield drain wire to be used as common wire and to connect directly to the L60 COM terminal 3 others function cor rectly only if the common wire is connected to the L60 COM terminal but in...

Страница 80: ...h communication ports An iso lated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling To ensure maximum reliability all equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed Terminate both ends of the RS485 circuit with an impedance as shown below Figure 3 23 RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION c 100BASE FX FIBER OPTIC PORTS Ensure that the dust covers are instal...

Страница 81: ...le for generating the IRIG B signal this equipment can use a GPS satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can be syn chronized Figure 3 24 OPTIONS FOR THE IRIG B CONNECTION Using an amplitude modulated receiver causes errors up to 1 ms in event time stamping UR series device BNC in Receiver RG58 59 coaxial cable GPS satellite system GPS connec...

Страница 82: ...T settings which define the acceptable voltage threshold received from the PLC The L60 communications outputs are MOSFETs and inputs are implemented with optocouplers excluding any galvanic connection between PLC connections and the relay boards Figure 3 25 L60 TO PLC CONNECTIONS FOR A TWO TERMINAL LINE 831784A3 CDR Transmission channel 1 Station battery Reception channel 1 Transmission channel 1 ...

Страница 83: ...ics for the transmitter and receiver Transmitter characteristics Operating voltage range 0 to 300 V DC typical points 15 V 48 V 125 V 250 V Output current limitation 100 mA maximum 30 mA nominal Receiver characteristics Input voltage range 0 to 300 V DC Input impedance 25 kohms Input current 10 mA at 250 V 5 mA at 125 V 2 mA at 48 V ...

Страница 84: ... interconnection for dual channel type 7 communications modules is shown as follows Two channel modules allow for a redundant ring configuration That is two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path The required connections are UR1 Tx1 to UR2 Rx1 UR2 Tx1 to UR3 Rx1 UR3 Tx1 to UR4 Rx1 and UR4 Tx1 to UR1 Rx1 for the first ring and UR1 Tx2 to UR4 Rx2 UR4 Tx2 to UR3 Rx2 UR3 T...

Страница 85: ...pend on options purchased The options are outlined in the Inter Relay Communications section of the Order Code tables in Chapter 2 All of the fiber modules use ST type connectors 3 3 2 FIBER LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A 7B 7C 7H 7I and 7J fiber only modules Figure 3 29 LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES 842013A2 CDR Channel 1 Channel 2 Tx1 UR 2 Tx2 Rx1 ...

Страница 86: ...ing figure shows configuration for the 2I and 2J fiber laser module Figure 3 31 2I AND 2J LASER FIBER MODULE Observing any fiber transmitter output can injure the eye When using a laser Interface attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the maximum optical input power to the receiver 1 channel 2 channels Rx1 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx1 Tx2 831720A5 CDR 72 and 7D modules 73 and 7K modules ...

Страница 87: ...TION BETWEEN TWO G 703 INTERFACES Pin nomenclature can differ from one manufacturer to another Therefore it is not uncommon to see pinouts num bered TxA TxB RxA and RxB In such cases it can be assumed that A is equivalent to and B is equivalent to b G 703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES 1 With the power to the relay off remove the G 703 module 7R or 7S as follows Record the original location of the mo...

Страница 88: ... is disabled OFF d G 703 TIMING MODES There are two timing modes for the G 703 module internal timing mode and loop timing mode default Internal Timing Mode The system clock is generated internally Therefore the G 703 timing selection should be in the internal timing mode for back to back UR to UR connections For back to back connections set for octet timing S1 OFF and timing mode to internal timi...

Страница 89: ...face Figure 3 35 G 703 MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE In dual loopback mode the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals Differential Manchester data enters the Differential Manchester receiver module and then is returned to the differential Manchester...

Страница 90: ...ne clock input for the two RS422 channels The system functions correctly when the following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing feature Terminal timing is a common fea ture to most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source Using the terminal timing feature two channel applications can be achieved if these connections are ...

Страница 91: ...ure proper system operation For example the following figure shows the positive edge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit Figure 3 40 CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS Data module 1 Data module 2 Signal name Signal name SD A Send data TT A Terminal timing TT B Terminal timing SD B Send data RD A Received data RD A Received data SD A Send data SD B Send data RD B Received data RD B Received da...

Страница 92: ...d the shield only at one end For the direct fiber channel address power budget issues properly When using a LASER Interface attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed maximum optical input power to the receiver Figure 3 41 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE data communications equipment units 3 3 7 G 703 AND FIBER ...

Страница 93: ...T recommended G 704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps The specifications for the module are as follows IEEE standard C37 94 for 1 128 kbps optical fiber interface for 2G and 2H modules or C37 94 for 2 64 kbps opti cal fiber interface for 76 and 77 modules Fiber optic cable typ...

Страница 94: ...module type 2G 2H 2I 2J 76 or 77 module as follows Record the original location of the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot 2 Simultaneously pull the ejector inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in order to release the module for removal 3 Remove the module cover screw 4 Remove the top cover by sliding it towards ...

Страница 95: ...is as follows Flashing green loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet Cover screw Top cover Bottom cover Ejector inserter clip Ejector inserter clip Timing selection switches Channel 1 Channel 2 FRONT REAR 831774A3 CDR Tx1 Tx2 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx2 CH1 Link Activity LED CH2 Link Activity LED COMMS 2B C37 94SM 1300nm single mode ELED 2 channel Technical support Tel 905 294 6222 Fax 905 201 20...

Страница 96: ...alid data packet Solid red switch to internal timing mode while not receiving a valid data packet The link activity LED status is as follows Flashing green FPGA is receiving a valid data packet Solid yellow FPGA is receiving a yellow bit and remains yellow for each yellow bit Solid red FPGA is not receiving a valid packet or the packet received is invalid ...

Страница 97: ...rface modules set to n 1 or 64 kbps Fiber optic cable type 9 125 m core diameter optical fiber Fiber optic mode single mode ELED compatible with HP HFBR 1315T transmitter and HP HFBR 2316T receiver Fiber optic cable length up to 11 4 km Fiber optic connector type ST Wavelength 1300 40 nm Connection as per all fiber optic connections a Tx to Rx connection is required The UR series C37 94SM communic...

Страница 98: ...moval 3 Remove the module cover screw 4 Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards 5 Set the timing selection switches channel 1 channel 2 to the desired timing modes see description above 6 Replace the top cover and the cover screw 7 Re insert the C37 94SM module Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position The eject...

Страница 99: ... switch to internal timing mode while not receiving a valid data packet The link activity LED status is as follows Flashing green FPGA is receiving a valid data packet Solid yellow FPGA is receiving a yellow bit and remains yellow for each yellow bit Solid red FPGA is not receiving a valid packet or the packet received is invalid Tx1 Tx2 Rx1 Rx2 Tx1 Tx2 CH1 Link Activity LED CH2 Link Activity LED ...

Страница 100: ...3 42 L60 Line Phase Comparison System GE Multilin 3 3 DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 3 HARDWARE 3 ...

Страница 101: ...on are required See the EnerVista UR Setup Help File or refer to the EnerVista UR Setup Software section in Chapter 1 for details 4 1 3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW a ENGAGING A DEVICE The EnerVista UR Setup software can be used in online mode relay connected to directly communicate with the L60 relay Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites Sites ca...

Страница 102: ...the application or provides focus to the already opened application If the file was a settings file has a URS extension that had been removed from the Settings List tree menu it is added back to the Settings List tree menu Drag and Drop The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target for device order code compatible files or individual menu ite...

Страница 103: ...age intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware This message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades 4 1 4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW The EnerVista UR Setup software main window supports the following primary display components 1 Title bar that shows the pathname of the active data view 2 Main window menu bar 3 Main win...

Страница 104: ...d by default The following procedure describes how to enable the settings tem plate for UR series settings files 1 Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen 2 Right click the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode Create Template option The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue The settings ...

Страница 105: ...ble by clicking them The setting available to view is displayed against a yellow background as shown below Figure 4 3 SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE 6 Click on Save to save changes to the settings template 7 Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings c ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE It is highly recommended that templates be saved with p...

Страница 106: ...y those settings available for editing Display all settings with settings not available for editing greyed out Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing 1 Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen 2 Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode View In Template Mode option 3 Enter the temp...

Страница 107: ...ecified by the template but all settings are shown The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below Figure 4 6 APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND e REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE It can be necessary at some point to remove a settings template Once a template is removed it cannot be reapplied and it is necessary to define a new settings tem...

Страница 108: ...ENTRIES The following procedure describes how to lock individual entries of a FlexLogic equation 1 Right click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode Create Template item to enable the set tings template feature 2 Select the FlexLogic FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item By default all FlexLogic entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow backg...

Страница 109: ...low and on the front panel display Figure 4 9 SECURED FLEXLOGIC IN GRAPHICAL VIEW b LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations can also be locked to a specific UR serial number Once the desired FlexLogic entries in a settings file have been secured use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a specific serial number 1 Select the s...

Страница 110: ...is infor mation can be compared with the L60 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the L60 device or obtained from the L60 device Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability information to the settings...

Страница 111: ...ay configuration since the settings file was saved a SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they are sent to a L60 device The L60 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup offline window as shown in the example below Figure 4 12 DEVICE DEFINITIO...

Страница 112: ...EL INFORMATION SERIAL NUMBER ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION LAST SETTING CHANGE c ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window then the traceability information is removed from the settings file If the user creates a new settings file then no traceability...

Страница 113: ...nerVista UR Setup software The front panel interface consists of LED panels an RS232 port keypad LCD display control pushbuttons and optional user programmable pushbuttons The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate that must be removed in order to access the keypad panel The following figure shows the hori...

Страница 114: ... reset via the SETTINGS INPUT OUTPUTS RESETTING menu The RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature Figure 4 18 TYPICAL LED INDICATOR PANEL FOR ENHANCED FACEPLATE The status indicators in the first column are described below IN SERVICE This LED indicates that control power is applied all monitored inputs outputs and internal systems...

Страница 115: ...ludes phase instantaneous overcurrent phase undervoltage etc This means that the phase A B and C operate oper ands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A B or C LEDs VOLTAGE This LED indicates voltage was involved CURRENT This LED indicates current was involved FREQUENCY This LED indicates frequency was involved OTHER This LED indicates a composite function was i...

Страница 116: ...on when the operate operand associated with the element is asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A B or C LEDs This includes phase instantaneous overcurrent phase undervoltage etc This means that the phase A B and C operate oper ands ...

Страница 117: ...eight user setting groups revisions 3 0x and higher support six setting groups For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions the relay panel shows eight setting groups Please note that the LEDs despite their default labels are fully user programmable The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2 The LEDs however are not pre programmed To match the pre printed label th...

Страница 118: ...er and press the Print button in the front panel report window 5 When printing is complete fold the sheet along the perforated lines and punch out the labels 6 Remove the L60 label insert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following procedures These tabs are used for removal of the default and custom LED labels It is important that the tool be used EXACTLY as shown below w...

Страница 119: ...upwards as shown below 2 Bend the tab at the center of the tool tail as shown below The following procedure describes how to remove the LED labels from the L60 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels 1 Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath Make sure the bent tabs are pointing away from the relay ...

Страница 120: ...wn below This attaches the label tool to the LED label 3 Remove the tool and attached LED label as shown below 4 Slide the new LED label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs as shown below The following procedure describes how to remove the user programmable pushbutton labels from the L60 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels ...

Страница 121: ...l of the label tool underneath as shown below Make sure the bent tab is pointing away from the relay 2 Slide the label tool under the user programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown below This attaches the label tool to the user programmable pushbutton label 3 Remove the tool and attached user programmable pushbutton label as shown below ...

Страница 122: ...roducts support ur GET 8494A doc This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel The following procedures are contained in the downloadable file The panel templates provide relative LED locations and located example text x edit boxes The following procedure demonstrates how to install uninstall the custom panel labeling 1 Remove the clear Lexan Fro...

Страница 123: ...ackground Template on top of the custom display module GE Multilin Part Number 1513 0069 and snap the clear custom module cover GE Multilin Part Number 1502 0015 over it and the templates 4 3 4 DISPLAY All messages are displayed on a backlit liquid crystal display LCD to make them visible under poor lighting conditions While the keypad and display are not actively being used the display defaults t...

Страница 124: ...aker is operated in the three pole only mode 3 pole or in the one and three pole 1 pole mode selected by setting If the mode is selected as three pole a single input tracks the breaker open or closed posi tion If the mode is selected as one pole all three breaker pole states must be input to the relay These inputs must be in agreement to indicate the position of the breaker For the following discu...

Страница 125: ...om mands have been issued within the last 30 minutes Press USER 1 To Select Breaker This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required This mes sage displays for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again BKR1 Name SELECTED USER 2 CLS USER 3 OP This message is displayed after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time Three possible actions can be performed ...

Страница 126: ...y until the header for the first page of Settings appears This page contains settings to configure the relay SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP Press the MESSAGE DOWN key to move to the next Settings page This page con tains settings for System Setup Repeatedly press the MESSAGE UP and DOWN keys to display the other setting headers and then back to the first Settings page header SECURITY From the Settings page...

Страница 127: ... the VALUE DOWN key displays the previous selection c ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT Text settings have data values which are fixed in length but user defined in character They can be upper case letters lower case letters numerals and a selection of special characters FLASH MESSAGE TIME 1 0 s For example select the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting MINIMUM 0 5 MAXIMU...

Страница 128: ... key until the SECURITY message appears on the display 3 Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display 4 Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the RELAY SETTINGS Not Programmed message is displayed 5 After the RELAY SETTINGS Not Programmed message appears on the display press the VALUE keys change the selection to Programmed 6 Press the ENTER key 7 When the NEW SETTI...

Страница 129: ...p to 10 characters and press the ENTER key 8 When the VERIFY NEW PASSWORD is displayed re type in the same password and press ENTER 9 When the NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED message appears your new Setting or Command Password will be active f CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD To change an existing password follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception A message prompts you t...

Страница 130: ...ia the any external communications inter face three times within a three minute time span the REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to On and the L60 does not allow Settings or Command access via the any external communications interface for the next ten minutes The REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to Off after the expiration of the ten minute timeout ...

Страница 131: ...L TIME CLOCK See page 5 64 FAULT REPORT See page 5 69 OSCILLOGRAPHY See page 5 71 DATA LOGGER See page 5 73 USER PROGRAMMABLE LEDS See page 5 74 USER PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS See page 5 77 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS See page 5 78 USER PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS See page 5 80 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS See page 5 86 USER DEFINABLE DISPLAYS See page 5 86 DIRECT I O See page 5 89 TELEPROTECTION See page 5 96 INSTAL...

Страница 132: ...e page 5 134 FLEXELEMENTS See page 5 135 NON VOLATILE LATCHES See page 5 140 SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 See page 5 141 SETTING GROUP 2 SETTING GROUP 6 SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS TRIP BUS See page 5 241 SETTING GROUPS See page 5 243 SELECTOR SWITCH See page 5 245 TRIP OUTPUT See page 5 251 SYNCHROCHECK See page 5 257 DIGITAL ELEMENTS See page 5 261 DIGITAL COUNTERS See page 5 264 MONI...

Страница 133: ...E DPS INPUTS See page 5 309 REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS See page 5 309 REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS See page 5 310 RESETTING See page 5 310 DIRECT INPUTS See page 5 311 DIRECT OUTPUTS See page 5 311 TELEPROTECTION See page 5 314 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS See page 5 316 IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS See page 5 317 SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I O DCMA INPUTS See page 5 318 RTD INPUTS See page 5 319 DCMA OUTPU...

Страница 134: ... the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT Use the secondary current base to convert per unit current settings to from a secondary current value and use the primary cur rent base to convert to from a primary current value Where the current source is the sum of two or more CTs with different nominal primary current the primary base quantity is the largest nominal prima...

Страница 135: ...n the operate state if the reset delay time is not 0 5 1 3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES a BACKGROUND The L60 is ordered with two CT VT modules If two breakers are involved in an application the current must be summed externally With two CT VT modules the L60 allows the connection of two breaker CTs directly to the relay processing the currents individually for some functions and summing them for oth...

Страница 136: ... The following table explains how to configure the sources for full functionality Table 5 1 SOURCE CONFIGURATION FOR PHASE COMPARISON FUNCTION CT VT MODULE 1 TYPE 8P CT VT MODULE 1 TYPE 8F SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 Phase current F1 to F3 CT channels used for 87PC first current and Breaker Failure 1 Not available L1 to L3 CT channels used for 87PC second current and Breaker Failure 2 This source is c...

Страница 137: ...modules in a chassis to three The maximum number of sources is six A summary of CT VT module configurations is shown below c CT VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION Upon relay startup configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relay are automatically generated from the order code Within each bank a channel identification label is automatically assigned to each bank...

Страница 138: ...e to reset the relay to the factory defaults 2 Enter the reset code on the front panel under COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE SERVICE COMMAND 3 Change the default password of ChangeMe1 as outlined in the Setting Up CyberSentry and Changing Default Pass word section in the first chapter PASSWORD REQUIREMENTS A user account requires an alpha numeric password that meets the following requirements Password ...

Страница 139: ...ither by the user or by timeout via the setting and command level access timeout settings The remote setting and command ses sions are initiated by the user through the EnerVista UR Setup software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout The state of the session local or remote setting or command determines the state of the following FlexLogic operands ACCESS LOC SETG OFF Asserted when lo...

Страница 140: ... Click the command or setting password Change button 3 Enter the new password in the New Password field Requirements are outlined in the Password Requirements section at the beginning of the chapter When an original password has already been used enter it in the Enter Password field and click the Send Password to Device button 4 Re enter the password in the Confirm Password field 5 Click the OK bu...

Страница 141: ...IMEOUT This setting specifies the length of inactivity no local or remote access required to return to restricted access from the command password level DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS The dual permission security access feature provides a mechanism for customers to prevent unauthorized or unintended upload of settings to a relay...

Страница 142: ...d for remote Ethernet or RS485 interfaces setting access supervision If this setting is On the default setting then remote setting access functions as normal that is a remote password is required If this setting is Off then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is pro vided If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand then the operand must be asserted set a...

Страница 143: ...ed to enter a username and password ADDING A NEW USER The following pre requisites are required to add user accounts to the EnerVista security management system The user adding the account must have administrator rights The EnerVista security management system must be enabled previous section To add user accounts 1 Select the Security User Management menu item to open the user management window 2 ...

Страница 144: ...ual values Settings Allows the user to read setting values Commands Allows the user to execute commands Event Recorder Allows the user to use the digital fault recorder FlexLogic Allows the user to read FlexLogic values Update Info Allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges When any of the Settings Event Recorder and FlexLogic check boxes are enabled by themselves ...

Страница 145: ...ation RADIUS only No password or security information is displayed in plain text by the EnerVista software or UR device nor are they ever transmitted without cryptographic protection Only TCP UDP ports and services that are needed for device configuration and for customer enabled features are open All the other ports are closed For example Modbus is on by default so its TCP port number 502 is open...

Страница 146: ...parison System GE Multilin 5 2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS 5 CYBERSENTRY SETTINGS THROUGH ENERVISTA CyberSentry security settings are configured under Device Settings Product Setup Security Figure 5 3 CYBERSENTRY SECURITY PANEL ...

Страница 147: ...65535 1812 Administrator Primary Accounting Port RADIUS accounting port 1 65535 1813 Administrator Vendor ID An identifier that specifies RADIUS vendor specific attributes used with the protocol Value that represents General Electric Administrator RADIUS Authentication Shared Secret Shared secret used in authentication It displays as asterisks This setting must meet the CyberSentry password requir...

Страница 148: ...isabled To re enable device authentication the Supervisor unlocks the device for setting changes and then the Administrator can re enable device authentication Disabled Enabled Enabled Administrator Firmware Locked Indicates if the device receives firmware upgrades If Yes and the firmware upgrade attempt is made the device denies the upgrade and displays an error message that the lock is set On ea...

Страница 149: ...upervisor role authenticates to unlock the UR relay for setting changes and not approve changes after the fact Only Supervisor can set the Settings and Firmware Lock in the Security Settings This role also has the ability to forcefully logoff any other role and clear the security event log This role can also be disabled but only through a Supervisor authentication When this role is disabled its pe...

Страница 150: ...pervisor approval can change the role associated password In CyberSentry password encryption is not supported Session Settings PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY SESSION SETTINGS The following session settings are available SESSION LOCKOUT This setting specifies the number of failed authentications the default is three and the maxi mum is 99 before the device blocks subsequent authentication att...

Страница 151: ...pts setting changes and whether the device can receive a firmware upgrade This setting can be changed only by the Supervisor role if it is enabled or by the Administrator if the Supervisor role is disabled The Supervisor role enables this setting for the relay to start accepting setting changes or command changes or firmware upgrade After all the setting changes are applied or com mands executed t...

Страница 152: ... security use the following procedure for set up 1 Log in to the relay as Administrator by using the Value keys on the front panel to enter the default password ChangeMe1 Note that the Lock relay setting needs to be disabled in the Security Supervisory menu When this setting is disabled configuration and firmware upgrade are possible By default this setting is disabled 2 Enable the Supervisor role...

Страница 153: ...hanges log out When changing settings offline ensure that only settings permitted by the role that performs the set tings download are changed because only those changes are applied Pushbuttons both user control buttons and user programmable buttons located on the front panel can be pressed by an Administrator or Engineer role This also applies to the reset button which resets targets where target...

Страница 154: ...ntication Failed 2 User Lockout 3 FW Upgrade 4 FW Lock 5 Settings Lock 6 Settings Change Because this can fill the entire event log it is supported by the already existing Settings_Change log file This event is not required 7 Clear Oscillography command 8 Clear Data Logger command not applicable to all UR products 9 Clear Demand Records command not applicable to all UR products 10 Clear Energy com...

Страница 155: ...sure ments at the fractional volt level can be affected by noise Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed as zero while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual sig nal The L60 applies a cut off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages If the magnitude is below the cut off level it is substituted with zer...

Страница 156: ...ssword Thus if they are used to clear records the user programma ble pushbuttons can provide extra security if required For example to assign user programmable pushbutton 1 to clear demand records the following settings should be applied 1 Assign the clear demand function to pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu CLEAR DEMAND PUSHBUTTON 1...

Страница 157: ...ports If IEC 60870 103 is chosen as the protocol valid baud rates are 9600 and 19200 bit s and valid parity is Even RS485 COM2 RESPONSE MIN TIME This setting specifies the minimum time before the rear RS485 port transmits after receiv ing data from a host This feature allows operation with hosts that hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after each transmission COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL PORT...

Страница 158: ... 0 IP3 Mask3 10 3 1 2 255 255 255 0 where LAN3 is 10 3 1 x 255 255 255 0 Example 2 IP1 Mask1 10 1 1 2 255 0 0 0 where LAN1 is 10 x x x 255 0 0 0 IP2 Mask2 11 1 1 2 255 0 0 0 where LAN2 is 11 x x x 255 0 0 0 IP3 Mask3 12 1 1 2 255 0 0 0 where LAN3 is 12 x x x 255 0 0 0 Example 3 Incorrect IP1 Mask1 10 1 1 2 255 0 0 0 IP2 Mask2 10 2 1 2 255 0 0 0 IP3 Mask3 10 3 1 2 255 0 0 0 This example is incorrec...

Страница 159: ... uses the IP and MAC address of P2 Figure 5 6 MULTIPLE LANS WITH REDUNDANCY Multiple LANS No Redundancy The following topology provides local configuration monitoring through EnerVista software on LAN1 to which port 1 P1 is connected access to the public network on LAN2 to which port 2 P2 is connected and communications with SCADA on LAN3 to which port 3 P3 is connected There is no redundancy Figu...

Страница 160: ...et to None ports 2 and 3 operate independently with their own MAC IP and mask addresses If REDUNDANCY is set to Failover the operation of ports 2 and 3 is as follows Ports 2 and 3 use the port 2 MAC address IP address and mask The configuration fields for IP address and mask on port 3 are hidden Port 3 is in standby mode and does not actively communicate on the Ethernet network but monitors its li...

Страница 161: ...ncluded in UR 7 that allows for detection of link failures The purpose of the Far End Fault feature is to allow the stations on both ends of a pair of fibers to be informed when there is a problem with one of the fibers Without the Far End Fault feature it is impossible for a fiber interface to detect a prob lem that affects only its transmit fiber When the Far End Fault feature is supported a los...

Страница 162: ...ed to align PRP with the High availability Seamless Redundancy HSR protocol To achieve this the original PRP was modified at the cost of losing compatibility with the PRP 2010 ver sion The revised standard IEC 62439 3 2012 is commonly referred to as PRP 1 while the original standard is PRP 0 The UR relays support only PRP 1 The relay implements PRP on two of its Ethernet ports specifically Port 2 ...

Страница 163: ... by Static Routes To delete a route 1 Replace the route destination with the default loopback address 127 0 0 1 When deleting a route the mask and gateway must be also brought back to default values 2 Delete the default route by replacing the default gateway with the default value 127 0 0 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS TO BE SATISFIED BY STATIC ROUTES The following rules are validated internally The route m...

Страница 164: ... 1 1 Port 2 IP address 10 1 2 2 connects the UR to LAN 10 1 2 0 24 and to the EnerVista software through Router 2 Router 2 has an interface on 10 1 2 0 24 and the IP address of this interface is 10 1 2 1 The configuration before release 7 10 was as follows PRT1 IP ADDRESS 10 1 1 2 PRT1 SUBNET IP MASK 255 255 255 0 PRT1 GWY IP ADDRESS 10 1 1 1 PRT2 IP ADDRESS 10 1 2 2 PRT2 SUBNET IP MASK 255 255 25...

Страница 165: ...nce with protocol specifications for broadcast messages never replies Addresses do not have to be sequential but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors occur Generally each device added to the link should use the next higher address starting at 1 When using Modbus TCP IP the client must use the programmed MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS value in the Unit Identifier field Se...

Страница 166: ...G DNP CHANNEL 1 2 PORT SETTINGS RS232 RS485 ETHERNET DNP Channel 1 Eth TCP Channel 2 Eth TCP Modbus Modbus DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Channel 1 Eth TCP Channel 2 none Modbus Modbus DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Channel 1 none Channel 2 Eth TCP Modbus Modbus DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Channel 1 Eth UDP Channel 2 none Modbus Modbus DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Channel 1 Eth TCP Channel 2 RS485 Modbus DNP DNP Modbus IEC 61850 Ch...

Страница 167: ...100000 MESSAGE DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP POWER SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP ENERGY SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP PF SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP OTHER SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 1...

Страница 168: ...ng is set to Network UDP the channel 1 DNP protocol can be used over UDP IP on the Ethernet ports See the DNP appendix for information on the DNP protocol Changes to these settings take effect when power has been cycled to the relay Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP UDP port number as this results in unreliable operation of those protocols The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave a...

Страница 169: ... be 10 times larger The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing analog input data These settings group the L60 analog input data into the following types current voltage power energy power factor and other Each setting represents the default deadband value for all analog input points of that type For example to trigger unsolic ited responses from th...

Страница 170: ...of dead network TCP connections If there is no data traffic on a DNP TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting the connection will be aborted by the L60 This frees up the connection to be re used by a client Relay power must be re cycled after changing the DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting for the changes to take effect k DNP IEC 60870 5 104 POINT LISTS PATH SETTINGS PROD...

Страница 171: ...ts will not take effect until the L60 is restarted l IEC 61850 PROTOCOL PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL The L60 Line Phase Comparison System is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications capability This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering See the Order Codes section in chap ter 2 for details ANALOG INPUT MME POINTS Point 0 Off Range ...

Страница 172: ...TIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION The general transmission settings are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION GENERAL The DEFAULT GSSE GOOSE UPDATE TIME sets the time between GSSE or GOOSE messages when there are no remote out put state changes to be sent When remote output data changes GSSE or G...

Страница 173: ... address to be set This address must be a multicast address the least significant bit of the first byte must be set In L60 releases previous to 5 0x the destination Ethernet MAC address was determined automatically by taking the sending MAC address that is the unique local MAC address of the L60 and setting the multicast bit The GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY setting indicates the Ethernet priority of GOOSE ...

Страница 174: ...ets 1 through 8 the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre configured rate even if no changes in the data items are detected The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE mes sages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message The L60 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of the...

Страница 175: ...nsfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices The general steps required for transmission configuration are 1 Configure the transmission dataset 2 Configure the GOOSE service settings 3 Configure the data The general steps required for reception configuration are 1 Configure the reception dataset 2 Configure the GOOSE service settings 3 Configure the data Table 5 7 GOOSE RETRANSMISSION SCHEMES SC...

Страница 176: ...d must match the configuration on the receiver the default value is 0 Set the CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV value This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7 2 For this example it can be left at its default value 3 Configure the data by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTO COL GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION settings menu Set GGIO1 INDICATION 1 to...

Страница 177: ...ned by the GGIO1 ST Ind1 stVal value in the sending device The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a com plete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software For intercommunication between L60 IEDs the fixed DNA UserSt dataset can be used The DNA UserSt dataset contains the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GS...

Страница 178: ...e two data items The Boolean status values from these data items can be utilized as remote input FlexLogic operands First the REMOTE DEVICE 1 16 DATASET setting must be set to contain dataset GOOSEIn 1 that is the first configurable dataset Then REMOTE IN 1 16 ITEM settings must be set to Dataset Item 1 and Dataset Item 2 These remote input FlexLogic operands will then change state in accordance w...

Страница 179: ...n the L60 is restarted Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP UDP port number as this results in unreliable operation of those protocols The SERVER SCANNING feature should be set to Disabled when IEC 61850 client server functionality is not required IEC 61850 has two modes of functionality GOOSE GSSE inter device communication and client server communication If the GOOSE GSSE functional...

Страница 180: ...nd values used to determine when the update the MMXU mag and cVal values from the associated instmag and instcVal values The mag and cVal values are used for the IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reports These settings correspond to the associated db data items in the CF functional con straint of the MMXU logical node as per the IEC 61850 standard According to IEC 61850 7 3 the db value shall repr...

Страница 181: ...to control the L60 virtual inputs The GGIO4 analog configuration points are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GGIO4 ANALOG CONFIGURATION The NUMBER OF ANALOG POINTS setting determines how many analog data points will exist in GGIO4 When this value is changed the L60 must be rebooted in order to allow the GGIO4 logical node to be re instantiated and contain t...

Страница 182: ...not all values can be stored Some values may be rounded to the closest possible floating point number The GGIO5 integer configuration points are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GGIO5 ANALOG CONFIGURATION The GGIO5 logical node allows IEC 61850 client access to integer data values This allows access to as many as 16 unsigned integer value points associated ...

Страница 183: ... a value from the list of IEC 61850 data attributes supported by the L60 Changes to the dataset will only take effect when the L60 is restarted It is recommended to use reporting service from logical node LLN0 if a user needs some but not all data from already existing GGIO1 GGIO4 and MMXU4 points and their quantity is not greater than 64 minus the number items in this dataset REPORT 1 DATASET ITE...

Страница 184: ...can result in very large OpCnt values over time This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to 0 for XCBR1 XCBR CONFIGURATION XCBR1 ST LOC OPERAND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE XCBR6 ST LOC OPERAND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt No Range No Yes MESSAGE CLEAR XCBR6 OpCnt No Range No Yes MESSAGE XCBR1 SYNCCHECK CLS Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE XCBR6 SYNCCHECK CLS Of...

Страница 185: ...ete details on these control models The XCBR1 Pos sboTimeout setting is used to select SBO timeout value To be successful the IEC 61850 operate com mand must be executed after the select command within the XCBR1 Pos sboTimeout setting value The disconnect switch configuration settings are shown below Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is restarted PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP...

Страница 186: ...CP UDP port number as this results in unreliable operation of those protocols n TFTP PROTOCOL PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS TFTP PROTOCOL The Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP can be used to transfer files from the L60 over a network The L60 operates as a TFTP server TFTP client software is available from various sources including Microsoft Windows NT The dir txt file obtained from ...

Страница 187: ...of mea sured value short floating point value points can be used to change threshold values from the default for each individual M_ME_NC_1 analog point Whenever power is removed and re applied to the L60 the default thresholds are in effect The IEC REDUNDANCY setting decides whether multiple client connections are accepted or not If redundancy is set to Yes two simultaneous connections can be acti...

Страница 188: ...a communication line so the entire range of 254 addresses is never exhausted IEC103 SYNC TIMEOUT This setting defines the time that the L60 waits for a synchronization message The L60 synchro nizes its clock using all available sources with the source synching more frequently overwriting the time of the other sources Since the synchronization message received from the IEC 60870 5 103 master is les...

Страница 189: ...formation Object Identifier field of the ASDU as defined in IEC60870 5 103 The binary input points are sent as Class 1 data They are sent either as a response to a general interrogation received from the controller or reported spontaneously Spontaneous transmission occurs as a response to cyclic Class 2 requests If the L60 wants to transmit Class 1 data at that time it demands access for Class 1 d...

Страница 190: ... SETTINGS 5 PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC60870 5 103 IEC103 INPUTS MEASURANDS IEC103 INPUTS MEASURANDS ASDU 1 Range see sub menu below MESSAGE ASDU 2 Range see sub menu below MESSAGE ASDU 3 Range see sub menu below MESSAGE ASDU 4 Range see sub menu below ...

Страница 191: ...SAGE ASDU 1 ANALOG 9 FACTOR 1 000 Range 0 000 to 65 535 in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ASDU 1 ANALOG 9 OFFSET 0 Range 32768 to 32767 in steps of 1 ASDU 4 ASDU 4 TYP 9 Range 3 or 9 MESSAGE ASDU 4 FUN 0 Range 0 to 255 in steps of 1 MESSAGE ASDU 4 INF 0 Range 0 to 255 in steps of 1 MESSAGE ASDU 4 SCAN TOUT 0 Range 0 to 1000 s in steps of 1 MESSAGE ASDU 4 ANALOG 1 Off Range FlexAnalog parameter MESSAGE ASD...

Страница 192: ...not allowed to skip ASDU2 and configure measurands in ASDU3 ANALOG FACTOR AND OFFSET For each measurand included in the ASDU a factor and offset can also be configured The factor and offset allow for scaling to be performed on measurands The final measurement sent to the IEC60870 103 mas ter is then a x b where x is the measurand a is the multiplying factor and b is the offset The master has to pe...

Страница 193: ...erent virtual inputs Each command is identified by the unique combination made by the function type FUN and information number INF If the master sends an ASDU command that does not have the FUN and INF of any configured command the relay rejects it Table 5 8 COMMANDS MAPPING TABLE IEC103 COMMANDS COMMAND 0 Range see sub menu below MESSAGE COMMAND 1 Range see sub menu below MESSAGE COMMAND 31 Range...

Страница 194: ... as an electronic watch approximately 1 minute per month 23 ppm Once the RTC is synchronized with the Precision Time Protocol PTP IRIG B or SNTP its accuracy approaches that of the synchroniz ing time delivered to the relay The SYNCHRONIZING SOURCE setting configures the priority sequence of the time synchronization source to determine which of the available external time sources to use for time s...

Страница 195: ...OCK PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL 1588 PTP PORT 1 3 The UR supports the Precision Time Protocol PTP specified in IEEE Std 1588 2008 using the Power Profile PP specified in IEEE Std C37 238 2011 This enables the relay to synchronize to the international time standard over an Ethernet net work that implements PP The relay can be configured to operate on some PTP networks that are not strictly PP Time accu...

Страница 196: ...relay s real time clock The following settings are available for configuring the relay for PTP STRICT POWER PROFILE Power profile IEEE Std C37 238 2011 requires that the relay only select as a grandmaster power profile compliant clocks that the delivered time have worst case error of 1 µs and that the peer delay mechanism be implemented With the strict power profile setting enabled the relay will ...

Страница 197: ...econds the Ethernet propagation delay to the relay is longer than the mean of path propagation delays to and from the relay For instance if it is known say from the physical length of the fibers and the propagation speed in the fibers that the delay from the relay to the Ethernet switch it is connected to is 9 000 ns and the that the delay from the switch to the relay is 11 000 ns then the mean de...

Страница 198: ... is synchronized with a communications protocol providing only UTC such as PTP or SNTP the time offset setting is used to determine local time from the UTC provided PTP ALTERNATE_TIME_OFFSET_INDICATOR TLVs are not used to calculate local time When a communications protocol other than PTP provides UTC to local time offset meaning IRIG B that offset is used instead of the local time and daylight tim...

Страница 199: ...seconds waiting for the fault report trigger If trigger does not occur within this time the values are cleared to prepare for the next disturbance Fault current and voltage phasors one cycle after the trigger Elements operated at the time of triggering Events 9 before trigger and 7 after trigger only available via the relay webpage Fault duration times for each breaker created by the breaker arcin...

Страница 200: ...T 1 SOURCE setting selects the source for input currents and voltages and disturbance detection The FAULT 1 REPORT TRIG setting assigns the FlexLogic operand representing the protection element elements requiring operational fault location calculations The distance to fault calculations are initiated by this signal The FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 MAG and FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 MAG impedances are entered in secon...

Страница 201: ...tc A trigger position of 25 consists of 25 pre and 75 post trigger data The TRIGGER SOURCE is always captured in oscillography and may be any FlexLogic parameter element state contact input virtual output etc The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals that is current and voltage are stored Reducing the sampl...

Страница 202: ...used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display It can be quite time consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad and display entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed All eight CT VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file The CT VT module channels are named as follows slot_letter ter...

Страница 203: ...g DATA LOGGER DATA LOGGER MODE Continuous Range Continuous Trigger MESSAGE DATA LOGGER TRIGGER Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE DATA LOGGER RATE 60000 ms Range 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1 MESSAGE DATA LOGGER CHNL 1 Off Range Off any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list MESSAGE DATA LOGGER CHNL 2 Off Range Off any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A Flex...

Страница 204: ...rameters available in a given relay are dependent on the type of relay the type and number of CT VT hardware modules installed and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed Upon startup the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is shown in Appendix A FlexAnalog Parameters The parameter index number sh...

Страница 205: ...s are controlled by the test sequence rather than the protection control and monitor ing features However the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay and stores the actual LED states on or off in memory When the test completes the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting from relay response during testing The reset pushbutton will not clear any targets whe...

Страница 206: ...essary to test all LEDs Next release the pushbutton to automatically start stage 2 Once stage 2 has started the pushbutton can be released When stage 2 is completed stage 3 will automatically start The test may be aborted at any time by pressing the pushbutton c TRIP AND ALARM LEDS PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER PROGRAMMABLE LEDS TRIP ALARM LEDS The trip and alarm LEDs are in the first LED colum...

Страница 207: ...operand BREAKER 2 OPEN LED 3 operand SETTING GROUP ACT 3 LED 15 operand BREAKER 2 CLOSED LED 4 operand SETTING GROUP ACT 4 LED 16 operand BREAKER 2 TROUBLE LED 5 operand SETTING GROUP ACT 5 LED 17 operand SYNC 1 SYNC OP LED 6 operand SETTING GROUP ACT 6 LED 18 operand SYNC 2 SYNC OP LED 7 operand Off LED 19 operand Off LED 8 operand Off LED 20 operand Off LED 9 operand BREAKER 1 OPEN LED 21 operan...

Страница 208: ...roups and invoking and scrolling though user programmable displays Firmware revisions 3 2x and older use these three pushbuttons for manual breaker control This functionality has been retained if the breaker control feature is configured to use the three pushbuttons they cannot be used as user program mable control pushbuttons The location of the control pushbuttons are shown in the following figu...

Страница 209: ... the event record as per user setting when a control pushbutton is pressed No event is logged when the pushbutton is released The faceplate keys including control keys cannot be operated simultaneously a given key must be released before the next one can be pressed The control pushbuttons become user programmable only if the breaker control feature is not configured for manual control via the USER...

Страница 210: ...The user programmable pushbuttons are under the control level of password protection The user configurable pushbuttons for the enhanced faceplate are shown below USER PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Self Reset Latched Disabled MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEX...

Страница 211: ...ed in non volatile memory and maintained through a loss of control power The pushbutton is reset deactivated in latched mode by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 RESET set ting or by directly pressing the associated active front panel pushbutton It can also be programmed to reset automatically through the PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST and PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY set tings These settings enable t...

Страница 212: ...tile memory Should the power supply be lost the correct state of the pushbutton is retained upon subsequent power up of the relay PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT This setting specifies the top 20 character line of the user programmable message and is intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton See the User definable Displays section for instructions on how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keyp...

Страница 213: ...e to the PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT setting This message can be temporary removed if any front panel keypad button is pressed However ten seconds of keypad inactivity will restore the message if the PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is still active If the PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE is set to Normal the message programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings will be displayed as long as PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand ...

Страница 214: ...Lock SETTING Off 0 Local Lock SETTING Off 0 Set SETTING Off 0 Reset SETTING Enabled Disabled Autoreset Function FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF TIMER 200 ms 0 AND AND AND AND AND TIMER 50 ms 0 TIMER 50 ms 0 SETTING Autoreset Delay TPKP 0 TIMER 200 ms 0 AND AND SETTING Drop Out Timer TRST 0 PUSHBUTTON ON To user programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 2 842024A2 LA...

Страница 215: ...G any FlexLogic operand PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL AND SETTING Flash Message Time TRST 0 PUSHBUTTON ON LATCHED LATCHED SELF RESET AND From user programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 1 842021A3 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF SETTING TRST 0 Instantaneous reset LCD MESSAGE ENGAGE MESSAGE SETTINGS XXXXXXXXXX Top Text XXXXXXXXXX On Text The message is temporarily removed if ...

Страница 216: ...and ACTUAL VALUES top level menus The sub menus facili tate text entry and Modbus register data pointer options for defining the user display content Once programmed the user definable displays can be viewed in two ways KEYPAD Use the MENU key to select the USER DISPLAYS menu item to access the first user definable display note that only the programmed screens are displayed The screens can be scro...

Страница 217: ...e character is used to mark the start of a data field the length of the data field needs to be accounted for Up to five separate data fields can be entered in a user display the nth tilde refers to the nth item A user display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the EnerVista UR Setup interface preferred for convenience The following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top a...

Страница 218: ...nd bottom line items are different USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE Current X A Shows user defined text with first tilde marker MESSAGE DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE Current Y A Shows user defined text with second tilde marker MESSAGE DISP 1 ITEM 1 6016 Shows decimal form of user selected Modbus register address corresponding to first tilde marker MESSAGE DISP 1 ITEM 2 6357 Shows decimal form of user selected ...

Страница 219: ...signaled by the following FlexLogic operands 1 DIRECT RING BREAK direct input output ring break This FlexLogic operand indicates that direct output messages sent from a UR series relay are not being received back by the relay 2 DIRECT DEVICE 1 OFF to DIRECT DEVICE 16 OFF direct device offline These FlexLogic operands indicate that direct output messages from at least one direct device are not bein...

Страница 220: ...ORTED DATA RATES 74 Channel 1 64 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 7L Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 7M Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 7P Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 7T Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps 7W Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 7V Channel 1 64 kbps 128 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 128 kbps 2A Channel 1 64 kbps 2B Chann...

Страница 221: ... con nected via single channel digital communication cards as shown in the figure below Figure 5 18 INPUT AND OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS In the above application the following settings should be applied For UR series IED 1 DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID 1 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O DATA RATE 128 kbps For UR series IED 2 DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID 2 DIRECT I O CH1 RI...

Страница 222: ...th rings are healthy IED 1 to IED 2 0 2 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 3 0 4 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 4 0 2 of power system cycle IED 2 to IED 3 0 2 of power system cycle IED 2 to IED 4 0 4 of power system cycle IED 3 to IED 4 0 2 of power system cycle If one ring is broken say TX2 RX2 the delivery times are as follows IED 1 to IED 2 0 2 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 3 0 4 of po...

Страница 223: ...T OUTPUT DEVICE ID 2 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION Yes For UR series IED 3 DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID 3 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION Yes In this configuration the following delivery times are expected at 128 kbps IED 1 to IED 2 0 2 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 3 0 5 of power system cycle IED 2 to IED 3 0 2 of p...

Страница 224: ... CH1 2 PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I O CRC ALARM CH1 2 The L60 checks integrity of the incoming direct input and output messages using a 32 bit CRC The CRC alarm function is available for monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check The monitoring function counts all incoming messages including messages that failed the CRC check A separate...

Страница 225: ...suming the best case of only 1 bit error in a failed packet having 1 failed packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 10 4 c UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1 2 PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I O UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1 2 The L60 checks integrity of the direct input and output communication ring by counting unreturned messages In the ring configuration all messages originating ...

Страница 226: ... OF TERMINALS is 3 three terminal system set the NUMBER OF CHANNELS to 2 For a two terminal system the NUMBER OF CHANNELS can set to 1 or 2 redundant channels LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER and TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER In installa tions that use multiplexers or modems it is desirable to ensure that the data used by the relays protecting a given line is from the correct relays T...

Страница 227: ...lay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to Programmed This setting is defaulted to Not Programmed when at the factory The UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the Programmed state The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay This name will appear on generated reports INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS Not Programmed Range Not Programmed Progr...

Страница 228: ...tion the ground CT primary rating must be entered To detect low level ground fault currents the sensitive ground input may be used In this case the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered Refer to chapter 3 for more details on CT connections Enter the rated CT primary current values For both 1000 5 and 1000 1 CTs the entry would be 1000 For correct opera tion the CT secondary rating mus...

Страница 229: ...ls when nominal voltage is applied to the VT primary For example on a system with a 13 8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400 120 volt VT in a delta connec tion the secondary voltage would be 115 that is 13800 14400 120 For a wye connection the voltage value entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115 66 4 On a 14 4 kV system with a delta connection and a VT primary to s...

Страница 230: ...e signals is used for frequency metering and tracking for better performance dur ing fault open pole and VT and CT fail conditions The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration regardless of whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay Phase angle of the reference signal always displays zero degrees and all other phase...

Страница 231: ...re 5 A rated User selection of AC parameters for comparator elements CT VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs Users must select the specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu The internal design of the ele ment specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for source selection I...

Страница 232: ...current cut off level The default cut off threshold is 0 02 pu thus by default the disturbance detector responds to a change of 0 04 pu The metering sensitivity setting PROD UCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES CURRENT CUT OFF LEVEL controls the sensitivity of the disturbance detector accordingly EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES An example of the use of sources is shown in the diagram below A relay could have the f...

Страница 233: ...E USE OF SOURCES Y LV D HV AUX SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 Phase CT M1 F1 F5 None Ground CT M1 None None Phase VT M5 None None Aux VT None None U1 827794A1 CDR F 5 F 1 DSP Bank U 1 M 1 M 1 M 5 51BF 1 51BF 2 Source 4 87T 51P UR Relay A V V A W W Var Var Amps Source 1 Source 3 Volts Amps Amps Volts Amps Source 2 ...

Страница 234: ...LOSE Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 A 3P CLSD Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 A 3P OPND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 B CLOSED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 B OPENED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 C CLOSED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 C OPENED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 Toperate 0 070 s ...

Страница 235: ... is used to track phase A and the BREAKER 1 B and BREAKER 1 C settings select operands to track phases B and C respectively BREAKER 1 A 3P OPND This setting selects an operand usually a contact input that should be a normally closed 52 b status input to create a logic 1 when the breaker is open If a separate 52 b contact input is not available then the inverted BREAKER 1 CLOSED status signal can b...

Страница 236: ...ETTING Enabled BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL USER 2 OFF ON To open BRK1 Name SETTING Off 0 BREAKER 1 CLOSE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR CLOSE BKR 1 SETTING Off 0 BREAKER 1 BLOCK CLOSE SETTING MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 MNL CLS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 ON CMD FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 1 OFF CMD BREAKER 1 TRIP A BREAKER 1 TRIP B BREAKER 1 TRIP C To breaker control logic sheet ...

Страница 237: ...AND BREAKER 1 OPEN BREAKER 1 DISCREP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 TROUBLE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 1 ΦA BAD ST BREAKER 1 ΦA CLSD BREAKER 1 ΦA OPEN BREAKER 1 INTERM ΦA FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN BREAKER 1 1P OPEN BREAKER 1 OOS SETTING 3 Pole 1 Pole BREAKER 1 MODE SETTING Off BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM SETTING Off BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV AND OR OR SETTING BR...

Страница 238: ...ed to disconnect switch 1 SWITCH 1 MODE This setting selects 3 Pole mode where disconnect switch poles have a single common auxiliary switch or 1 Pole mode where each disconnect switch pole has its own auxiliary switch SWITCH 1 SWITCH 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE SWITCH 1 NAME SW 1 Range up to 6 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE SWITCH 1 MODE 3 Pole Range 3 Pole 1 Pole MESSAGE ...

Страница 239: ...put to create a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is open If a separate 89 b contact input is not available then an inverted 89 a status signal can be used SWITCH 1 B CLOSED If the mode is selected as three pole this setting has no function If the mode is selected as single pole this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B closed position as above for phase A SWITCH 1 B OPENED If the...

Страница 240: ...TCH 1 ΦB INTERM FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SWITCH 1 Φ BAD ST C SWITCH 1 ΦC CLSD SWITCH 1 ΦC OPEN SWITCH 1 ΦC INTERM 859713A1 CDR SETTING SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY 0 SETTING Off SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE SETTING Off SWITCH 1 CLOSE SETTING Off SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN SETTING Off SWITCH 1 OPEN SETTING Disabled Enabled SWITCH 1 FUNCTION AND AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SWITCH 1 ON CMD FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SWITCH 1 OFF CMD OR OR AND AND ...

Страница 241: ...00 to 0 98 and 1 03 to 20 00 This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points To enter a custom FlexCurve enter the reset and operate times using the VALUE keys for each selected pickup point using the MESSAGE UP DOWN keys for the desired protection curve A B C or D FLEXCURVE A FLEXCURVE A TIME AT 0 00 xPKP 0 ms Range 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 Table 5...

Страница 242: ...ith a minimum response time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples There are 41 recloser curve types supported These definite oper ating times are useful to coordinate operating times typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream pro tective devices have different operating characteristics The recloser curve configuration window shown below appears when the Initialize...

Страница 243: ... ms see below Figure 5 30 COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED With the HCT feature enabled the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup Figure 5 31 COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed If this is attempted the EnerVista UR Setup software gen...

Страница 244: ...SER CURVES GE113 GE120 GE138 AND GE142 GE104 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE101 GE102 GE103 GE106 GE105 842723A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE113 GE142 GE138 GE120 842725A1 CDR ...

Страница 245: ... AND GE201 Figure 5 35 RECLOSER CURVES GE131 GE141 GE152 AND GE200 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE134 GE151 GE140 GE137 GE201 842730A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE131 GE200 GE152 GE141 842728A1 CDR ...

Страница 246: ...S GE116 GE117 GE118 GE132 GE136 AND GE139 842729A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE133 GE163 GE162 GE161 GE165 GE164 842726A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE116 GE132 GE118 GE117 GE139 GE136 ...

Страница 247: ...2 Figure 5 39 RECLOSER CURVES GE119 GE135 AND GE202 842724A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE121 GE114 GE112 GE122 GE107 GE115 GE111 842727A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE119 GE202 GE135 ...

Страница 248: ...applies to the other features that set flags elements virtual inputs remote inputs schemes and human operators If more complex logic than presented above is required it is implemented via FlexLogic For example if it is desired to have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of the phase time overcurrent element the two cont...

Страница 249: ... 1 ON IF Contact Input On Cont Ip On Voltage is presently applied to the input external contact closed Off Cont Ip Off Voltage is presently not applied to the input external contact open Contact Output type Form A contact only Current On Cont Op 1 Ion Current is flowing through the contact Voltage On Cont Op 1 VOn Voltage exists across the contact Voltage Off Cont Op 1 VOff Voltage does not exists...

Страница 250: ...ted Advanced fault detector high rate of change of the negative sequence current has operated Advanced fault detector low rate of change of the positive sequence current has operated Advanced fault detector high rate of change of the positive sequence current has operated Advanced fault detector low negative sequence current has operated Advanced fault detector high negative sequence current has o...

Страница 251: ... FAIL 1 ELEMENT Breaker control BREAKER 1 OFF CMD BREAKER 1 ON CMD BREAKER 1 A BAD ST BREAKER 1 A INTERM BREAKER 1 A CLSD BREAKER 1 A OPEN BREAKER 1 B BAD ST BREAKER 1 B INTERM BREAKER 1 B CLSD BREAKER 1 B OPEN BREAKER 1 C BAD ST BREAKER 1 C INTERM BREAKER 1 C CLSD BREAKER 1 C OPEN BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS BREAKER 1 CLOSED BREAKER 1 OPEN BREAKER 1 DISCREP BREAKER 1 TROUBLE BREAKER 1 MNL CLS BREAKER 1 ...

Страница 252: ...s OFF Logic 0 LATCH 2 to LATCH 16 Same set of operands as shown for LATCH 1 ELEMENT Line pickup LINE PICKUP OP LINE PICKUP PKP LINE PICKUP DPO LINE PICKUP I A LINE PICKUP I B LINE PICKUP I C LINE PICKUP UV PKP LINE PICKUP LEO PKP LINE PICKUP RCL TRIP Line pickup has operated Line pickup has picked up Line pickup has dropped out Line pickup detected phase A current below 5 of nominal Line pickup de...

Страница 253: ...hase A Open pole undercurrent condition is detected in phase B Open pole undercurrent condition is detected in phase C ELEMENT Phase directional overcurrent PH DIR1 BLK A PH DIR1 BLK B PH DIR1 BLK C PH DIR1 BLK Phase A directional 1 block Phase B directional 1 block Phase C directional 1 block Phase directional 1 block PH DIR2 Same set of operands as shown for PH DIR1 ELEMENT Phase distance PH DIS...

Страница 254: ...1 has picked up Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out PHASE TOC2 to TOC6 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE TOC1 ELEMENT Phase und...

Страница 255: ...ub harmonic stator ground module trouble has picked up Sub harmonic stator ground module trouble has dropped out Sub harmonic stator ground module trouble has operated ELEMENT Disturbance detector SRC1 50DD OP SRC2 50DD OP Source 1 disturbance detector has operated Source 2 disturbance detector has operated ELEMENT VTFF Voltage transformer fuse failure SRC1 VT FF OP SRC1 VT FF DPO SRC1 VT FF VOL L...

Страница 256: ...IP PHASE C TRIP AR INIT 3 POLE TRIP FORCE 3 POLE TRIP OUTPUT OP TRIP Z2PH TMR INIT TRIP Z2GR TMR INIT Trip all three breaker poles A single pole trip and reclose operation is initiated Trip breaker pole A initiate phase A breaker fail and reclose Trip breaker pole B initiate phase B breaker fail and reclose Trip breaker pole C initiate phase C breaker fail and reclose Initiate a three pole reclose...

Страница 257: ...hen the front panel PICKUP LED is on Asserted when the front panel VOLTAGE LED is on Asserted when the front panel CURRENT LED is on Asserted when the front panel FREQUENCY LED is on Asserted when the front panel OTHER LED is on Asserted when the front panel PHASE A LED is on Asserted when the front panel PHASE B LED is on Asserted when the front panel PHASE C LED is on Asserted when the front pan...

Страница 258: ...battery is not functioning Return power supply module to manufacturer Relay is not synchronized to the international time standard A direct device is configured but not connected The Direct I O settings is for a connection that is not in a ring The configuration of modules does not match the stored order code A FlexLogic equation is incorrect A difference is detected between the desired and actual...

Страница 259: ...ies the last entry in the list of processed FlexLogic parameters One shot POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge A one shot refers to a single input gate that generates a pulse in response to an edge on the input The output from a one shot is True positive for only one pass through the FlexLogic equation There is a maximum of 64 one shots NEGATIVE ONE SHOT One shot that ...

Страница 260: ...16 17 through 25 to AND 9 and the outputs from these two gates to AND 2 Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator is used as an input to more than one following operator If so the operator output must be assigned as a virtual output For the example shown above the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR 1...

Страница 261: ...r to start at the out put end of the equation and work back towards the input as shown in the following steps It is also recommended to list operator inputs from bottom to top For demonstration the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99 and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn Until accustomed to using FlexLogic it is suggested that a worksheet with a series of ...

Страница 262: ... set of parame ters into a logic diagram The result of this process is shown below which is compared to the logic for virtual output 3 dia gram as a check Figure 5 46 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 6 Repeating the process described for virtual output 3 select the FlexLogic parameters for Virtual Output 4 99 The final output of the equation is virtual output 4 which is parameter Virt Op 4 ...

Страница 263: ...cases where a lot of processing is required to perform logic this may be difficult to achieve but in most cases will not cause problems as all logic is calculated at least four times per power frequency cycle The possibility of a problem caused by sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic before it is placed in service In the following equation virtual out...

Страница 264: ...GIC EQUATION EDITOR PATH SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR There are 512 FlexLogic entries available numbered from 1 to 512 with default END entry settings If a Disabled Element is selected as a FlexLogic entry the associated state flag will never be set to 1 The key may be used when editing FlexLogic equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types 5 4 6 FLEX...

Страница 265: ...N Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME FxE1 Range up to 6 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 IN Off Range Off any analog actual value parameter MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 IN Off Range Off any analog actual value parameter MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE Signed Range Signed Absolute MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE Level Range Level Delta MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION ...

Страница 266: ... Sample applications for the Absolute setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both directions monitoring power regardless of its direction or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal increases of decreases The element responds directly to its operating signal as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 IN FLEXELEMENT 1 IN and FLEX ELEM...

Страница 267: ...tion with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra charac teristics as shown in the figure below FlexElement 1 OpSig FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION Over PICKUP HYSTERESIS of PICKUP FlexElement 1 OpSig FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION Under PICKUP HYSTERESIS of PICKUP 842705A1 CDR ...

Страница 268: ... analog actual values measured by the relay The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting is entered in per unit values using the following definitions of the base units Table 5 19 FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS BREAKER ARCING AMPS Brk X Arc Amp A B and C BASE 2000 kA2 cycle dcmA BASE maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the IN and IN inputs DELTA TIME BASE 1 µs FREQUENC...

Страница 269: ...ing specifies the reset delay of the element SOURCE CURRENT IBASE maximum nominal primary RMS value of the IN and IN inputs SOURCE POWER PBASE maximum value of VBASE IBASE for the IN and IN inputs SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE maximum nominal primary RMS value of the IN and IN inputs SYNCHROCHECK Max Delta Volts VBASE maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the IN and IN inputs ZBASE ZBASE ...

Страница 270: ...ted the specified FlexLogic operand resets Latch 1 Figure 5 51 NON VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE N 1 to 16 AND LOGIC LATCH 1 LATCH 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE LATCH 1 TYPE Reset Dominant Range Reset Dominant Set Dominant MESSAGE LATCH 1 SET Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE LATCH 1 RESET Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE LATCH 1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latche...

Страница 271: ...pter See also the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of this chap ter 5 5 2 SETTING GROUP PATH SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 Each of the six setting group menus is identical Setting group 1 the default active group automatically becomes active if no other group is active see the Control elements section for additional details SETTING GROUP 1 PHASE COMPARISON ELEMENTS S...

Страница 272: ... 87PC BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE 87PC SIGNAL SOURCE One Source Current Range One Source Current Two Sources Current MESSAGE 87PC SIGNAL Mixed I_2 K I_1 Range Mixed I_2 K I_1 Mixed I_1 I_2 K 3I_0 MESSAGE 87PC MIXED SIGNAL K 0 20 Range 0 00 to 0 25 in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE 87PC MIXED SIGNAL REF ANGLE 0 Range 0 to 359 in steps of 1 MESSAGE 87PC FDL PICKUP 0 50 pu Range 0 02 to 15 00 pu...

Страница 273: ... to 125 0 V in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE 87PC CH2 RX VOLT 12 0 V Range 0 0 to 125 0 V in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE 87PC TRIP SECURITY First Coincidence Range First Coincidence Enhanced MESSAGE 87PC SECOND COINCID TIMER 40 ms Range 10 to 200 ms in steps of 1 MESSAGE 87PC STABILITY ANGLE 75 Range 40 to 140 in steps of 5 MESSAGE 87PC ENHANCED STAB ANGLE 110 Range 40 to 180 in steps of 5 MESSAGE 87PC PICKUP DEL...

Страница 274: ...t for the originally developed operating signal The oper ating signal is always developed taking phase A as reference for calculating symmetrical components This setting can be used to control the angular position of the operating current with respect to the voltage of any phase that might be used by the line carrier in a particular application This allows minimizing the impact of positive corona ...

Страница 275: ...Each coincidence period is treated independently When set to Enhanced the function applies the value for the first coincidence period specified by 87PC ENHANCED STAB ANGLE setting If the integrated value is less than this more stringent stability angle setting the function does not trip If the integrated value is greater than the regular stability angle setting but less than the enhanced trip leve...

Страница 276: ...put operand is set and reset on every cycle 87PC TRANS BLOCK PICKUP This setting increases sensitivity during and after the clearing of an external fault and prevents false tripping during transient current intervals If a pickup delay is used the this setting must be increased by the time specified in the 87PC PICKUP DELAY setting 87PC TRANS BLOCK RESET Resets transient blocking and allows trippin...

Страница 277: ...aker 87PC POS Positive current local pulse for both breakers 87PC NEG Negative current local pulse for both breakers 87PC FDL Low set fault detection for both breakers 87PC FDH High set fault detection for both breakers 87PC Rx1P Voltage Received pulse voltage on channel 1P 87PC Rx1P Received pulse on channel 1P 87PC Rx1N Voltage Received voltage on channel 1N 87PC Rx1N Received pulse on channel 1...

Страница 278: ... make a trip decision within this time if the PLC signal was lost in the course of the fault The phase comparison function can be used for three terminal line protection and breaker and a half configuration The feature combines the advantages of the modern digital relay with the traditional analog principle approach Pulses received from a PLC are digitally sampled at 64 samples per cycle providing...

Страница 279: ...gle Enhanced Stability Angle Trip Security Second Coincidence Timer dt T STAB ANG Positive half integrator dt T STAB ANG Negative half integrator SETTING Reset Delay 0 T RST AND SETTINGS Transient Reset T RST T PKP 87PC TRANS BLOCK OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS 87PC PKP 87PC DPO 87PC OP OR SETTINGS Signal Mixed Signal K FDL Pickup 87PC FDL AUX FDH Pickup Scheme Select FDH AUX Asymmetry Ch1 Asymmetry Ch2 P...

Страница 280: ... of the positive sequence current above threshold All advanced fault detectors operate independently from each other and independently from the mixed signal overcurrent FDL and FDH comparators embedded in the 87PC function Each detector supports the low and high setting levels to facil itate starting and supervise tripping When enabled a given detector is automatically used to control the 87PC fun...

Страница 281: ...of the low set stage used to control the key operation The nominal phase to ground voltage of the VT bank of the relay is 1 pu For example for a phase VT bank configured in wye and having 63 5 V nominal secondary or for a phase VT bank configured in delta and having 110 V nominal sec ondary 1 pu is equivalent to 63 5 V NEG SEQ VOL FDH PICKUP This setting controls pickup of the high set stage used ...

Страница 282: ...e nominal current of the phase CT bank of the relay is 1 pu NEG SEQ di dt FDH SEAL IN This setting defines seal in time of the FDH function To equalize the response between all terminals of the line the timer is started at the rising edge of the raw di dt condition In this way the fault detectors reset approximately at the same time at all line terminals regardless of responses of individual raw c...

Страница 283: ...uired a given fault detec tor shall be disabled To effectively disable the overcurrent fault detectors under the main 87PC menu set their thresh old very high RATE OF CHANGE OF POS SEQ CURRENT POS SEQ di dt FD FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE POS SEQ di dt FDL PICKUP 0 10 pu Range 0 01 to 5 00 pu in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POS SEQ di dt FDL SEAL IN 0 600 s Range 0 000 to 10 000 s in ...

Страница 284: ...for the symmetrical external three phase faults starting as non symmetrical defined by the POS SEQ DI DT FDH SEAL IN setting time The overreaching dis tance function should typically be assigned with this setting POS SEQ di dt BLK Note that the fault detector is hard wired to the 87PC scheme It can be disabled permanently using the function setting or blocked temporarily using this block setting S...

Страница 285: ...ed permanently using the function setting or blocked temporarily with this setting This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that blocks this fault detector when asserted NEG SEQ I_2 FD TARGET This setting controls targets of the negative sequence overcurrent advanced fault detector function These targets operate independently from the 87PC targets NEG SEQ I_2 FD EVENTS This setting controls event ...

Страница 286: ...led permanently using the function setting or blocked temporarily with this setting This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that blocks this fault detector when asserted POS SEQ I_1 FD TARGET This setting controls targets of the positive sequence overcurrent advanced fault detector function These targets operate independently from the 87PC targets POS SEQ I_1 FD EVENTS This setting controls event...

Страница 287: ...ensa tion on the other end However even with compensation operating at one end or 1 3 of the charging current is still removed from the net phase comparison current Alternatively the customer may choose to switch to another setting group with more conservative phase comparison settings during a VT fuse fail condition POSITIVE and ZERO SEQUENCE CAPACITIVE REACTANCE The values of positive and zero s...

Страница 288: ...ctance If identical reactors are installed at both ends of the line the inductive reactance is divided by 2 or 3 for a three terminal line before inserting in the above equations If the reactors installed at both ends of the line are different the following equations apply 1 For a two terminal line 2 For a three terminal line Charging current compensation calculations should be performed for an ar...

Страница 289: ...is open BRK 1 CONT SUPV Selects a supervising element such as a test normal switch usually used in breaker 1 control schemes or any other elements If no element is required the default value Off should be used BRK 2 AUX CONTACT If supervision of two breakers is required this setting is used to assign a FlexLogic operand to control open close state of the Breaker 2 with either 52a or 52b type conta...

Страница 290: ... no current supervision WEAK INFEED PICKUP DELAY This setting delays operation of weak infeed keying during some transient condi tions such as breaker reclosure etc WEAK INFEED RESET DELAY The weak infeed keying function incorporates a default 35 ms reset delay to assure reset coordination with the FDH trip level fault detector at the remote terminal during fault clearing The default reset time ca...

Страница 291: ...e is being re energized from the local ter minal pickup of an overreaching zone 2 or excessive phase current within eight power cycles after the autorecloser issues a close command results in the LINE PICKUP RCL TRIP FlexLogic operand For security the overcurrent trip is supervised by LINE PICKUP LINE PICKUP FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE LINE PICKUP SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC...

Страница 292: ...R AND AND AND AND AND OR OR OR AND OR 0 8 cycles IC 0 05 pu IA 0 05 pu IB 0 05 pu AND OR AND AND AND OR 10 ms 0 AND AND SETTING Enabled 1 Function SETTING Off 0 Block VAG VAB VBG VBC VCG VCA IC IA IB SETTING Signal Source SETTING Disabled 0 Autoreclose Coordination Bypass FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z2 PKP PH DIST Z2 PKP SETTING Enabled 1 Distance Trip SETTING Off 0 Autoreclose Accelerate FLEXLOGI...

Страница 293: ...em may experience power swing conditions rotating the voltage and current phasors slowly while the memory voltage is static as frozen at the beginning of the fault Keeping the memory in effect for too long may eventually lead to incorrect operation of the distance functions The distance zones can be forced to become self polarized through the FORCE SELF POLAR setting Any user selected con dition F...

Страница 294: ... b PHASE DISTANCE PATH SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 DISTANCE PHASE DISTANCE Z1 Z3 PHASE DISTANCE Z1 PHS DIST Z1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 DIR Forward Range Forward Reverse Non directional MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 SHAPE Mho Range Mho Quad MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION None Range None Dy1 Dy3 Dy5 Dy7 Dy9 Dy11 Yd1 Yd3 Yd5 Yd7 Yd9 Yd11 MESSAGE PHS...

Страница 295: ... under SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 DISTANCE The common distance settings described earlier must be properly chosen for correct operation of the phase distance ele ments Additional details may be found in chapter 8 Theory of operation Although all zones can be used as either instantaneous elements pickup PKP and dropout DPO FlexLogic operands or time delayed elements operate OP Flex...

Страница 296: ...nce defined by the PHS DIST Z1 REACH and PHS DIST Z1 RCA settings and the reverse reach imped ance defined by PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH and PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA as illustrated below PHS DIST Z1 SHAPE This setting selects the shape of the phase distance function between the mho and quadrilat eral characteristics The selection is available on a per zone basis The two characteristics and their possi...

Страница 297: ...ISTIC Figure 5 66 NON DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL PHASE DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC 837721A1 CDR X R RE AC H RCA DIR RCA DIR COMP LIMIT DIR COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT RGT BLD RCA LFT BLD RCA RGT BLD LFT BLD 837803A1 CDR X R R E AC H RCA COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT RGT BLD RCA LFT BLD RCA RGT BLD LFT BLD R E V R E AC H REV REACH RCA COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT ...

Страница 298: ...IT 60o X R R E A C H RCA 80o COMP LIMIT 60o DIR RCA 80o DIR COMP LIMIT 60o X R REACH RCA 90o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 45o DIR COMP LIMIT 90o 837723A1 CDR X R R E A C H RCA 80o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 80o DIR COMP LIMIT 90o RGT BLD RCA 80o LFT BLD RCA 80o X R X R X R R E A C H RCA 80o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 80o DIR COMP LIMIT 60o RGT BLD RCA 80o LFT BLD RCA 80o REACH RCA 90o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 45o...

Страница 299: ...he Z3 setting shall be set to None See the Theory of operation chapter for more details and the Application of settings chapter for information on calcu lating distance reach settings in applications involving power transformers Figure 5 69 APPLICATIONS OF THE PH DIST XFMR VOL CUR CONNECTION SETTINGS PHS DIST Z1 REACH This setting defines the zone reach for the forward and reverse applications In ...

Страница 300: ...is of the impedance plane see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figures The angular position of the blinder is adjustable with the use of the PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA setting This setting applies only to the quadrilateral characteristic and should be set giving consideration to the maximum load current and required resistive coverage PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA This setting defines th...

Страница 301: ... this functionality D60 L60 and L90 only Other UR series models apply regular current seal in for zone 1 OR OR OR OR AND AND AND AND AND AND 837017A8 CDR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 PKP AB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA OPEN POLE OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SETTING PH DIST Z1 DELAY TPKP 0 TPKP 0 TPKP 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 PKP BC FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 PKP CA ...

Страница 302: ... Off 0 PH DIST Z1 BLK SETTING IA IB IB IC DISTANCE SOURCE IC IA VAG VBG VBG VCG VCG VAG VAB VBC VCA V_1 I_1 Wye VTs Delta VTs SETTINGS PH DIST Z1 DIR RUN A B ELEMENT RUN B C ELEMENT RUN C A ELEMENT PH DIST Z1 SHAPE PH DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION PH DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION PH DIST Z1 REACH PH DIST Z1 RCA PH DIST Z1 REV REACH PH DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA PH DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT PH DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD...

Страница 303: ...01 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 RCA 85 Range 30 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 REV REACH 2 00 Range 0 02 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA 85 Range 30 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 POL CURRENT Zero seq Range Zero seq Neg seq MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 NON HOMOGEN ANG 0 0 Range 40 0 to 40 0 in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT 90 Range 30 to 90 in steps ...

Страница 304: ...d elements for all zones as entered under the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 DISTANCE menu 2 The MEMORY DURATION setting common for both phase and ground elements for all zones as entered under the SET TINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 DISTANCE menu The common distance settings noted at the start of this section must be properly chosen for correct operation of the ground distan...

Страница 305: ...D DIST Z1 ZOM Z1 MAG The ground distance elements can be programmed to apply compensation for the zero sequence mutual coupling between parallel lines If this compensation is required the ground current from the parallel line 3I_0 measured in the direction of the zone being compensated must be connected to the ground input CT of the CT bank configured under the DISTANCE SOURCE This setting specifi...

Страница 306: ...verse GND DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA This setting defines the angle of the reverse reach impedance if the zone is set to non directional GND DIST Z1 DIR setting This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to Forward or Reverse GND DIST Z1 POL CURRENT This setting applies only if the GND DIST Z1 SHAPE is set to Quad and controls the polarizing current used by the reactance comparator of t...

Страница 307: ...stance security against spuri ous neutral current during switch off transients three phase faults and phase to phase faults a positive sequence current restraint of 5 is applied to the neutral current supervision magnitude This setting should be at least three times the CURRENT CUTOFF LEVEL setting specified in the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES menu GND DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL This setting is releva...

Страница 308: ... PKP B FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z2 PKP C TIMER 0 ms 20 ms TIMER 0 ms 20 ms TIMER 0 ms 20 ms SETTING GND DIST Z2 DELAY TPKP 0 SETTING GND DIST Z2 DELAY TPKP 0 SETTING GND DIST Z2 DELAY TPKP 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z2 OP A FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z2 OP B FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z2 OP C FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z2 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TRIP Z2 GR TMR INIT OR OR OR AND OR AND OR AND AND ...

Страница 309: ...ST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT GND DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA TIMER 1 cycle 1 cycle SETTING GND DIST Z1 SUPV RUN IN 0 05 I_1 Pickup FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z1 PKP A GND DIST Z1 DPO A FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z1 PKP B GND DIST Z1 DPO B FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z1 PKP C GND DIST Z1 DPO C FLEXLOGIC OPE...

Страница 310: ...e supervision for zones 2 and 3 is removed during open pole conditions 837011AL CDR AND AND AND OR Quadrilateral characteristic only AND OR MEMORY V_1 0 80 pu I_1 0 025 pu SETTING Enabled 1 GND DIST Z2 FUNCTION SETTING Off 0 GND DIST Z2 BLK SETTING IA IB DISTANCE SOURCE IC VAG VBG VCG V_1 I_1 Wye VTs SETTINGS GND DIST Z2 ZOM Z1 ANG RUN A ELEMENT RUN B ELEMENT RUN C ELEMENT GND DIST Z2 POL CURRENT ...

Страница 311: ...eps of 0 001 MESSAGE POWER SWING FWD REACH 50 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID 60 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT 70 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING FWD RCA 75 Range 40 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE POWER SWING REV REACH 50 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps o...

Страница 312: ...T BLD 100 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING OUTER LFT BLD 100 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING MIDDLE RGT BLD 100 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING MIDDLE LFT BLD 100 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING INNER RGT BLD 100 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAG...

Страница 313: ...ation The out of step trip sequence identifies unstable power swings by determining if the imped ance locus spends a finite time between the outer and middle characteristics and then a finite time between the middle and inner characteristics The first step is similar to the power swing blocking sequence After timer POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1 times out latch 1 is set as long as the impedance stays ...

Страница 314: ...5 Figure 5 82 POWER SWING DETECT MHO OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS Figure 5 83 EFFECTS OF BLINDERS ON THE MHO CHARACTERISTICS OUTER M I D D L E I N N E R R E V R C A F W D R C A RE V RE AC H INNER LIM IT ANGLE MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE OUTER LIMIT ANGLE 827843A2 CDR FW D RE AC H R X 842734A1 CDR ...

Страница 315: ...ditions The POWER SWING INCOMING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an incoming locus the locus enters the inner characteristic The POWER SWING OUTGOING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an outgoing locus the locus leaving the outer characteristic This operand can be used to count unstable swings and take certain action only after pre defined number of ...

Страница 316: ...rac teristic The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho POWER SWING FWD RCA This setting specifies the angle of the forward reach impedance for the mho characteris tics angles of all the blinders and both forward and reverse reach impedances of the quadrilateral characteristics POWER SWING REV REACH This set...

Страница 317: ...AY 2 Controls the out of step tripping function in the three step mode only This timer defines the interval the impedance locus must spend between the middle and inner characteristics before the second step of the out of step tripping sequence is completed This time delay must be set shorter than the time required for the impedance locus to travel between the two characteristics during the fastest...

Страница 318: ...EGION INNER IMPEDANCE REGION RUN RUN RUN RUN POWER SWING REV REACH POWER SWING MIDDLE RGT BLD POWER SWING INNER RGT BLD POWER SWING SHAPE POWER SWING OUTER RGT BLD POWER SWING FWD REACH POWER SWING SUPV POWER SWING REV RCA POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH MID POWER SWING MIDDLE LFT BLD POWER SWING INNER LFT BLD POWER SWING FWD RCA POWER SWING OUTER LFT BLD POWER SWING FUNC...

Страница 319: ...R SWING SOURCE I_0 I_1 I_2 I_0 I_0 K_0 SETTING POWER SWING FUNCTION Enabled 1 I_1 I_1 K_1 I_2 I_2 K_2 RUN OR I_0 I_1 I_2 present values I_0 I_1 I_2 half a cycle old values K_0 K_2 three times the average change over last power cycle K_1 four times the average change over last power cycle AND 0 4 cycles TIMER 0 10 cycles TIMER FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING 50DD ...

Страница 320: ... SWING SEAL IN DELAY POWER SWING DELAY 1 RESET POWER SWING DELAY 1 PICKUP POWER SWING DELAY 2 PICKUP POWER SWING DELAY 3 PICKUP POWER SWING DELAY 4 PICKUP POWER SWING BLK Off 0 POWER SWING TRIP MODE POWER SWING MODE POWER SWING TRIP POWER SWING TMR2 PKP POWER SWING TMR4 PKP POWER SWING OUTGOING POWER SWING TMR3 PKP POWER SWING INCOMING POWER SWING BLOCK POWER SWING UN BLOCK POWER SWING 50DD POWER ...

Страница 321: ...ateral distance element LOAD ENCROACHMENT LOAD ENCROACHMENT FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT MIN VOLT 0 250 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT REACH 1 00 Range 0 02 to 250 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT ANGLE 30 Range 5 to 50 in steps of 1 M...

Страница 322: ...the element as shown in the Load encroachment characteristic diagram This setting should be entered in secondary ohms and be calculated as the pos itive sequence resistance seen by the relay under maximum load conditions and unity power factor LOAD ENCROACHMENT ANGLE This setting specifies the size of the blocking region as shown on the Load encroachment characteristic diagram and applies to the p...

Страница 323: ... above pickup Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable When this variable indi cates that the energy capacity has reached 100 a time overcurrent element will operate If less than 100 energy capac ity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98 of the pickup value the variable must be reduced Two m...

Страница 324: ... 845 2 439 8 0 181 454 76 174 29 174 16 014 10 374 7 419 5 674 4 555 3 794 3 252 10 0 226 817 95 217 36 467 20 017 12 967 9 274 7 092 5 693 4 742 4 065 IEEE VERY INVERSE 0 5 8 090 3 514 1 471 0 899 0 654 0 526 0 450 0 401 0 368 0 345 1 0 16 179 7 028 2 942 1 798 1 308 1 051 0 900 0 802 0 736 0 689 2 0 32 358 14 055 5 885 3 597 2 616 2 103 1 799 1 605 1 472 1 378 4 0 64 716 28 111 11 769 7 193 5 23...

Страница 325: ... 4 280 3 837 3 528 3 297 3 116 2 971 IEC CURVE B 0 05 1 350 0 675 0 338 0 225 0 169 0 135 0 113 0 096 0 084 0 075 0 10 2 700 1 350 0 675 0 450 0 338 0 270 0 225 0 193 0 169 0 150 0 20 5 400 2 700 1 350 0 900 0 675 0 540 0 450 0 386 0 338 0 300 0 40 10 800 5 400 2 700 1 800 1 350 1 080 0 900 0 771 0 675 0 600 0 60 16 200 8 100 4 050 2 700 2 025 1 620 1 350 1 157 1 013 0 900 0 80 21 600 10 800 5 400...

Страница 326: ... 488 1 239 1 060 0 926 IAC VERY INVERSE 0 5 1 451 0 656 0 269 0 172 0 133 0 113 0 101 0 093 0 087 0 083 1 0 2 901 1 312 0 537 0 343 0 266 0 227 0 202 0 186 0 174 0 165 2 0 5 802 2 624 1 075 0 687 0 533 0 453 0 405 0 372 0 349 0 331 4 0 11 605 5 248 2 150 1 374 1 065 0 906 0 810 0 745 0 698 0 662 6 0 17 407 7 872 3 225 2 061 1 598 1 359 1 215 1 117 1 046 0 992 8 0 23 209 10 497 4 299 2 747 2 131 1 ...

Страница 327: ...ustable from instanta neous to 600 00 seconds in steps of 10 ms EQ 5 16 EQ 5 17 where T Operate Time sec TDM Multiplier setting I Input Current Ipickup Pickup Current setting TRESET Reset Time in seconds assuming energy capacity is 100 and RESET Timed RECLOSER CURVES The L60 uses the FlexCurve feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves See the FlexCurve section in this chapter for det...

Страница 328: ...by a voltage restraint feature when enabled This is accom plished via the multipliers Mvr corresponding to the phase phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve see the figure below the pickup level is calculated as Mvr times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting If the voltage restraint feature is disabled the pickup level always remains at the setting value PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC1 FUNCTIO...

Страница 329: ... BLOCK C PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B PHASE TOC1 VOLT RESTRAINT PHASE TOC1 A PKP PHASE TOC1 A DPO PHASE TOC1 A OP PHASE TOC1 B PKP PHASE TOC1 B DPO PHASE TOC1 B OP PHASE TOC1 C PKP PHASE TOC1 C DPO PHASE TOC1 C OP PHASE TOC1 PKP PHASE TOC1 OP PHASE TOC1 SOURCE PHASE TOC1 RESET PHASE TOC1 CURVE PHASE TOC1 PICKUP PHASE TOC1 INPUT IA Seq ABC Seq ACB Set Multiplier Set Multiplier Set Multiplier Set Pickup Multi...

Страница 330: ...eps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 PICKUP DELAY 0 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 RESET DELAY 0 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 BLOCK B Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latched Dis...

Страница 331: ...or quadrature connection If there is a requirement to supervise overcurrent elements for flows in opposite directions such as can happen through a bus tie breaker two phase directional elements should be programmed with opposite element characteristic angle ECA settings PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1 PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC ...

Страница 332: ... select the source for the operating and polarizing signals The operating current for the phase directional element is the phase current for the selected current source The polar izing voltage is the line voltage from the phase VTs based on the 90 or quadrature connection and shifted in the leading direction by the element characteristic angle ECA PHASE DIR 1 ECA This setting is used to select the...

Страница 333: ...OC1 See page 5 205 MESSAGE NEUTRAL IOC2 See page 5 205 MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 1 See page 5 206 MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 2 See page 5 206 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION PHASE DIR 1 SOURCE PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK OC WHEN V MEM EXP PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK PHASE DIR 1 ECA PHASE DIR 1 POL V THRESHO...

Страница 334: ...s and the element is blocked the time accumulator will be cleared immediately Figure 5 96 NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL TOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC1 INPUT Phasor Range Phasor RMS MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 M...

Страница 335: ...d three phase faults The positive sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time multiple of pickup The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay single phase injection three phase pure zero sequence injection Figure 5 97 NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC NEUTRAL IOC1 NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE N...

Страница 336: ...ity EQ 5 19 The positive sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero sequence currents resulting from System unbalances under heavy load conditions NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING Voltage Range Voltage Cur...

Страница 337: ...rrent When NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT is set to Measured VX one third of this voltage is used in place of V_0 The following figure explains the usage of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element The figure below shows the voltage polarized phase angle comparator characteristics for a phase A to ground fault with ECA 90 element characteristic angle centerline of operating characteristic F...

Страница 338: ... V_X accordingly must be greater than the VOLTAGE CUTOFF LEVEL setting specified in the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES menu to be validated for use as a polariz ing signal If the polarizing signal is invalid neither forward nor reverse indication is given If Current polarizing is selected the element uses the ground current angle connected externally and configured under NEUTRAL OC1 SOURCE for p...

Страница 339: ... signal simulta neously IG current has to be above 0 05 ps to be used as operate quantity NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS SEQ RESTRAINT This setting controls the amount of the positive sequence restraint Set to 0 063 for backward compatibility with firmware revision 3 40 and older Set to zero to remove the restraint Set higher if large system unbalances or poor CT performance are expected NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFS...

Страница 340: ...TRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV Measured VX Voltage Calculated V_0 Current Ground Crt IG Zero Seq Crt I_0 Dual Dual V Dual I NOTE 1 CURRENT POLARIZING IS POSSIBLE ONLY IN RELAYS WITH THE GROUND CURRENT INPUTS CONNECTED TO AN ADEQUATE CURRENT POLARIZING SOURCE 2 GROUND CURRENT CAN NOT BE USED FOR POLARIZATION AND OPERATION SIMULTANEOUSLY 3 POSITIVE SEQUENCE RESTRAINT IS...

Страница 341: ...tion is made the auxiliary channel must be identified by the user as a neutral voltage under the VT bank settings This element operates when the auxil iary voltage is configured as neutral WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 1 WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 VOLT Calculated VN Ran...

Страница 342: ...ng equations A value of 1 pu represents the product of a 1 pu voltage as specified in the overvolt age condition for this element and a 1 pu current as specified in the overcurrent condition for this element WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 ECA This setting adjusts the maximum torque angle of the element The operating power is calculated as EQ 5 20 where indicates complex conjugate By varying the element char...

Страница 343: ... MULTIPLIER This setting is applicable if WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 CURVE above is selected to Inverse and defines the multiplier factor for the inverse time delay FORWARD FAULT REVERSE FAULT Vn In ECA 180 to 270 Vn In ECA 0 to 90 Vn In ECA 180 Vn In ECA 0 Vn In ECA 90 to 180 Vn In ECA 270 to 360 INDUCTIVE NETWORK RESISTIVE NETWORK CAPACITIIVE NETWORK 837804A1 CDR ...

Страница 344: ...TMETRIC GND FLT 1 VOLTAGE Calculated Measured SETTING WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 ECA S V conj I exp j ECA SETTINGS WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 OC PICKUP WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 OV PICKUP S OP PWR PICKUP I OC PICKUP MAG WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 PWR PICKUP V OV PICKUP MAG t PKP 0 SETTING WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 1 PWR PKP DEL SETTINGS WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 REF PWR RUN WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 MULTIPLIER FLEXLOGIC OPERAND WATTME...

Страница 345: ... accumulator will be cleared immediately These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT VT module The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0 02 to 46 times the CT rating This channel may be also equipped with a sensitive input The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0 002 to 4 6 times the CT rating GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC1 FUNCTION Disabled ...

Страница 346: ...ating GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 PICKUP DELAY 0 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 RESET DELAY 0 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 B...

Страница 347: ...tional Overcurrent elements These are described in the following sub sections NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT NEG SEQ TOC1 See page 5 218 MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC2 See page 5 218 MESSAGE NEG SEQ IOC1 See page 5 219 MESSAGE NEG SEQ IOC2 See page 5 219 MESSAGE NEG SEQ DIR OC1 See page 5 220 MESSAGE NEG SEQ DIR OC2 See page 5 220 SETTING GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION Enabled 1 SETTING GROUND IOC1 SOURCE IG GROUND IOC1 B...

Страница 348: ...mulator is cleared immediately Figure 5 104 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC NEG SEQ TOC1 NEG SEQ TOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC1 CURVE IEEE Mod Inv Range see OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER...

Страница 349: ...three phase faults The positive sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time multiple of pickup The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay single phase injection three phase injection opposite rotation Figure 5 105 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC NEG SEQ IOC1 NEG SEQ IOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled E...

Страница 350: ...operating quantity EQ 5 24 The positive sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious negative sequence and zero sequence currents resulting from System unbalances under heavy load conditions Transformation errors of current transformers CTs Fault inception and switch off transients NEG SEQ DIR OC1 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAG...

Страница 351: ...nt Table 5 31 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT UNIT Table 5 32 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL UNIT The negative sequence voltage must be greater than the VOLTAGE CUTOFF LEVEL setting specified in the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES menu to be validated for use as a polarizing signal If the polarizing signal is not validated neither forward nor reverse indication is given The following fig...

Страница 352: ...mation on how to calculate this setting In regular applications the offset impedance ensures proper operation even if the negative sequence voltage at the relaying point is very small If this is the intent the offset impedance shall not be larger than the negative sequence impedance of the protected circuit Practically it is several times smaller The offset impedance is entered in secondary ohms S...

Страница 353: ...on this pickup threshold applies to zero or negative sequence current When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive sequence restraint technique Figure 5 107 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC1 SCHEME LOGIC 827091A7 CDR AND AND AND AND AND OR OR NOTE V_2 is negative sequence voltage I_2 is negative sequence current I_0 is zero sequence current AND SETTING Off 0 ...

Страница 354: ... PICKUP 1 050 pu Range 0 001 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 USE TIMER 1 Yes Range Yes No MESSAGE BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 USE TIMER 2 Yes Range Yes No MESSAGE BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 USE TIMER 3 Yes Range Yes No MESSAGE BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 00...

Страница 355: ...de other breaker commands that are not indicative of a fault in the protected zone Schemes can be initiated either directly or with current level supervision It is particularly important in any application to decide if a current supervised initiate is to be used The use of a current supervised initiate results in the breaker failure ele ment not being initiated for a breaker that has very little o...

Страница 356: ...hs provide two levels of current supervision high set and low set that allow the supervision level to change from a current which flows before a breaker inserts an opening resistor into the faulted circuit to a lower level after resistor insertion The high set detector is enabled after timeout of timer 1 or 2 along with a timer that will enable the low set detector after its delay interval The del...

Страница 357: ...y for three pole tripping schemes BF1 USE TIMER 1 If set to Yes the early path is operational BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY Timer 1 is set to the shortest time required for breaker auxiliary contact Status 1 to open from the time the initial trip signal is applied to the breaker trip circuit plus a safety margin BF1 USE TIMER 2 If set to Yes the main path is operational BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY Timer 2...

Страница 358: ...roximately 90 of the resistor current This setting is valid only for three pole breaker failure schemes BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY Sets the pickup delay for current detection after opening resistor insertion BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY This setting is used to set the period of time for which the trip output is sealed in This timer must be coordinated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breaker ...

Страница 359: ...e SETTING IA IB IC SETTING RUN IC Pickup RUN IA Pickup RUN IB Pickup Initiated phase A to breaker failure single pole logic sheet 2 BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP A FLEXLOGIC OPERAND Initiated to breaker failure single pole logic sheet 2 TRIP PHASE C FLEXLOGIC OPERAND Phase Current Supervision Pickup SETTING Initiated phase B to breaker failure single pole logic sheet 2 BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP B FLEXLOGIC OPERAND In...

Страница 360: ...er failure logic sheet 1 0 Timer 2 Pickup Delay SETTING AND Use Timer 3 SETTINGS Yes 1 Breaker Pos 2 Phase A 3P Off 0 Breaker Pos 2 Phase B Off 0 Breaker Pos 2 Phase C Off 0 Breaker Test On Off 0 AND Initiated from single pole breaker failure logic sheet 1 0 Timer 3 Pickup Delay SETTING AND AND OR AND OR OR SETTING Phase Current HiSet Pickup RUN IA 0 LoSet Time Delay SETTING SETTING Phase Current ...

Страница 361: ...O SHEET 2 OF 2 Initiated TO SHEET 2 OF 2 827068 cdr BF1 FUNCTION Disable 0 Enable 1 SETTING BF1 BLOCK Off 0 SETTING BF1 INITIATE Off 0 SETTING BF1 USE SEAL IN YES 1 NO 0 SETTING BF1 USE AMP SUPV YES 1 NO 0 SETTING IA IB IN IC BF1 SOURCE SETTING IA PICKUP RUN BF1 PH AMP SUPV SETTINGS PICKUP BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP RUN RUN RUN IB PICKUP IC PICKUP IN PICKUP BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND ...

Страница 362: ...ICKUP SETTING AND SETTING BF1 TIMER1 PICKUP DELAY 0 SETTING AND SETTING NO 0 YES 1 BF1 USE TIMER 1 SETTING BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND NO 0 YES 1 BF1 USE TIMER 3 SETTING BF1 BKR POS2 A 3P Φ Off 0 SETTING BF1 BREAKER TEST ON Off 0 SETTING BF1 TIMER3 PICKUP DELAY 0 SETTING SETTINGS IB PICKUP IC PICKUP IN PICKUP BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY 0 SETTING RUN RUN IA PICKUP RUN BF1 N AMP L...

Страница 363: ...falls below the specified voltage setting The undervoltage feature may also be used to block the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements Source Transfer Schemes In the event of an undervoltage a transfer signal may be generated to transfer a load from its normal source to a standby or emergency power source VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 See page 5 235 MESSA...

Страница 364: ...0 seconds in steps of 0 01 The undervoltage elements can also be programmed to have an inverse time delay char acteristic The undervoltage delay setting defines the family of curves shown below EQ 5 25 where T operating time D undervoltage delay setting D 0 00 operates instantaneously V secondary voltage applied to the relay Vpickup pickup level Figure 5 114 INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES At 0 o...

Страница 365: ...ound Phase to Phase MESSAGE PHASE UV1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE UV1 CURVE Definite Time Range Definite Time Inverse Time MESSAGE PHASE UV1 DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE UV1 MINIMUM VOLTAGE 0 100 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE UV1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE UV1 TARGET ...

Страница 366: ...SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 PICKUP DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 RESET DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic Operand MESSAGE PHASE OV1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latched Disabled MESS...

Страница 367: ...this element must be configured for a phase VT VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element This function requires the VTs to be wye connected Figure 5 117 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC NEUTRAL OV1 NEUTRAL OV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP 0 300 pu ...

Страница 368: ...GE NEG SEQ OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 MESSAGE NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP 0 300 pu Range 0 000 to 1 250 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP DELAY 0 50 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE NEG SEQ OV1 RESET DELAY 0 50 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE NEG SEQ OV1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset L...

Страница 369: ...eristics The operating characteristics and equations for both definite and inverse time delay are as for the phase undervoltage element The element resets instantaneously The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked Figure 5 119 AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC AUXILIARY UV1 AUX UV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE AUX UV1 SIGNAL S...

Страница 370: ...ner delta VT connection Figure 5 120 AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC AUXILIARY OV1 AUX OV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE AUX OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE AUX OV1 PICKUP 0 300 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE AUX OV1 PICKUP DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AUX OV1 RESET DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to ...

Страница 371: ...pecific protection or control protection element and checking the desired bus box Once the desired element is selected for a specific bus a list of element operate type operands are displayed and can be assigned to a trip bus If more than one operate type operand is required it may be assigned directly from the trip bus menu TRIP BUS 1 TRIP BUS 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE TR...

Страница 372: ...elay should be set long enough to allow the breaker or contactor to perform a required action TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 to TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 These settings select a FlexLogic operand to be assigned as an input to the trip bus TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING This setting enables or disables latching of the trip bus output This is typically used when lockout is required or user acknowledgement of the relay response ...

Страница 373: ...c operand MESSAGE GROUP 1 NAME Range up to 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE GROUP 2 NAME Range up to 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE GROUP 6 NAME Range up to 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE SETTING GROUP EVENTS Disabled Range Disabled Enabled SETTINGS Off TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2 Off TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 Off TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 OR SETTINGS Enabled TRIP BUS 1 FUNCTION Off TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK AND AND L...

Страница 374: ...ng when the FlexLogic parameter is set to On This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions such as the breaker being open The GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON to GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON settings select a FlexLogic operand which when set makes the partic ular setting group active for use by any grouped element A priority scheme ensures that only one group...

Страница 375: ...nge Time out Acknowledge MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 ACK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE Time out Range Time out Acknowledge MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 POWER UP MODE Resto...

Страница 376: ...not take place and an alarm will be set SELECTOR 1 STEP UP This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch The switch is shifted to a new position at each rising edge of this signal The position changes incrementally wrapping up from the last SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE to the first position 1 Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every 50 ms After each ris...

Страница 377: ...e SELECTOR TIME OUT setting after the last activity of the three bit control inputs Note that the stepping up control input and three bit control input have independent acknowledging signals SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK accordingly SELECTOR 1 POWER UP MODE This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay When set to Restore the last position of the selector stored in ...

Страница 378: ...hese diagrams T represents a time out setting Figure 5 124 TIME OUT MODE 842737A1 CDR STEP UP 3BIT A0 3BIT A1 3BIT A2 POS 1 POS 2 POS 3 POS 4 POS 5 POS 6 POS 7 BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 pre existing position 2 changed to 4 with a pushbutton changed to 1 with a 3 bit input changed to 2 with a pushbutton T T T T changed to 7 with a 3 bit input STP ALARM BIT ALARM ALARM ...

Страница 379: ... it should synchronize the setting group to the three bit control input Make the following changes to setting group control in the SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTING GROUPS menu SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION Enabled GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 4 SETTING GROUPS BLK Off GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON Off GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 2 GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON Off GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 3 Make the ...

Страница 380: ...lowing changes in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION Self reset PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP OUT TIME 0 10 s The logic for the selector switch is shown below Figure 5 126 SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC 842012A2 CDR step up acknowledge 3 bit position out ON FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SELECTOR 1 POS 1 SELECTOR 1 POS 2 SELECTOR 1 POS 3 SELECTOR 1 POS 4 SELECTOR ...

Страница 381: ...GE TRIP RECLOSE INPUT 1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE TRIP RECLOSE INPUT 2 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE TRIP RECLOSE INPUT 6 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE TRIP SEAL IN DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE TRIP RESET CBaux OR Custom Range Pole Curr OR Custom CBaux OR Custom Custom MESSAGE START TMR Z2PH Inp1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE START TMR Z2P...

Страница 382: ...pole trip can be issued Outputs from this element are also directly connected as initiate signals to the breaker failure elements At least one internal protection element or digital input representing detection of a fault must be available as an input to this element In pilot aided scheme applications a timer can be used to delay the output decision until data from a remote ter minal is received f...

Страница 383: ...nd is present TRIP SEAL IN DELAY This setting specifies the minimum time that trip command signals are maintained to provide sufficient time to open the breaker poles If a value of 0 is specified then the output signal is reset once the protection elements initiating the trip are reset If a value other than 0 is specified then the protection elements must reset and the timer initiated at the first...

Страница 384: ...aying tripping on internal faults that follow detection of reverse faults solves the problem As long as the operand indicated under this setting is asserted the trip action is delayed by TRIP DELAY ON EVOLV FAULTS time Typically this operand should combine reverse zone indications such as zone 4 pickup with a half cycle pickup delay and two cycle dropout delay This setting should be used only in s...

Страница 385: ...LECT CG POTT TRIP 3P POTT TRIP A FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DUTT TRIP A PUTT TRIP A HYBRID POTT TRIP A DIR BLOCK1 TRIP A DCUB TRIP A 87L TRIP OP A PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C To trip output logic sheet 2 837034 3P PHASE SELECT VOID OR POTT TRIP B DUTT TRIP B PUTT TRIP B HYBRID POTT TRIP B DIR BLOCK1 TRIP B DCUB TRIP B 87L TRIP OP B OR POTT TRIP C DUTT TRIP C PUTT TRIP C HYBRID POTT TRIP C DIR BLOCK1 TRIP C DC...

Страница 386: ...Pole Curr OR Custom Custom FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OPEN POLE I A Φ OR TRIP OUTPUT OP OR OR Off Start Timer Z2Ph In2 SETTINGS Off OR Off Start Timer Z2Gr In2 Off Start Timer Z2Gr In1 From trip output logic sheet 1 837025AG AND AND Start Timer Z2Ph In1 TIMER ENABLED FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TRIP Z2PH TMR INIT TRIP Z2GR TMR INIT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND to phase distance zone 2 logic to ground distance zone 2 logic SET...

Страница 387: ...e frequency difference F This time can be calculated by EQ 5 26 where phase angle difference in degrees F frequency difference in Hz SYNCHROCHECK 1 SYNCHK1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE SYNCHK1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE SRC 2 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DIFF...

Страница 388: ...s the combination of dead and live sources that will by pass synchronism check function and permit the breaker to be closed when one or both of the two voltages V1 or and V2 are below the maximum voltage threshold A dead or live source is declared by monitoring the voltage level Six options are available None Dead Source function is disabled LV1 and DV2 Live V1 and Dead V2 DV1 and LV2 Dead V1 and ...

Страница 389: ... with both phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage ensure that only the auxiliary voltage is programmed in one of the sources to be used for synchrocheck Exception Synchronism cannot be checked between Delta connected phase VTs and a Wye connected auxil iary voltage 2 The relay measures frequency and Volts Hz from an input on a given source with priorities as established by the con figuration of i...

Страница 390: ...t SETTINGS ΔF Maximum Max Freq Diff Freq Hysteresis SETTING ΔΦ Maximum Max Angle Diff SETTING ΔV Maximum Max Volt Diff AND OR XOR AND AND AND AND AND 827076AD CDR ACTUAL VALUES Synchrocheck 1 ΔV Synchrocheck 1 ΔΦ Synchrocheck 1 ΔF AND SETTINGS Enabled 1 Function Off 0 Block AND AND AND AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SYNC1 V2 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 BELOW MAX SYNC1 V2 BELOW MAX FLEXLOGIC OPERA...

Страница 391: ...delay is not required set to 0 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP LED This setting enables or disabled the digital element pickup LED When set to Disabled the operation of the pickup LED is blocked Figure 5 130 DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE DIG ELEM 1 NAME Dig Element 1 Range 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE DIG ELEM 1 INP...

Страница 392: ...oper ation is required The circuit is considered to be healthy when the voltage monitor connected across the trip output contact detects a low level of current well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil If the circuit presents a high resis tance the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarm would be declared In most breaker control circuits the trip coil is ...

Страница 393: ... In this case it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position the BLOCK setting is selected to Off In this case the settings are as follows EnerVista UR Setup example shown Figure 5 132 TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 2 The wiring connection for two examples above is applicable to both form A contacts with voltage monitoring and solid state contact with voltage monitoring Tri...

Страница 394: ... to EQL or less than LO the set value COUNTER 1 UP Selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the counter If an enabled UP input is received when the accumulated value is at the limit of 2 147 483 647 counts the counter will rollover to 2 147 483 648 COUNTER 1 DOWN Selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the counter If an enabled DOWN input is received when the accumulated value is at t...

Страница 395: ...perand for capturing freezing the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation and resetting the count to 0 COUNTER 1 FREEZE COUNT Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing freezing the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation and continuing counting The present accumulated value and captured frozen value...

Страница 396: ...RE 2 See page 5 276 MESSAGE OPEN POLE See page 5 278 MESSAGE THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION See page 5 281 BREAKER 1 ARCING CURRENT BKR 1 ARC AMP FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE BKR 1 ARC AMP SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE BKR 1 ARC AMP INT A Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 ARC AMP INT B Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 ARC AMP INT C Off Range F...

Страница 397: ...ation Integration of the measured current continues for 100 ms which is expected to include the total arcing period The feature is programmed to perform fault duration calculations Fault duration is defined as a time between operation of the disturbance detector occurring before initiation of this feature and reset of an internal low set overcurrent function Cor rection is implemented to account f...

Страница 398: ...IT C BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP LIMIT CLEAR BREAKER 1 ARCING AMPS BKR 1 ARCING AMP FA BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FA BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FB BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FC BKR 1 OPERATING TIME BKR 1 ARCING AMP FB BKR 1 ARCING AMP FC BKR1 ARC OP BKR1 ARC DPO BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP SOURCE IA IB IC Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 NO 0 YES 1 Enabled 1 AND AND AND AND AND OR OR 827071A4 CDR KA Cycle Limit 2 SETTING BREAKER 1 ARCING...

Страница 399: ...one SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD A Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD B Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD C Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR V PKP 0 850 pu Range 0 000 to 1 500 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP 1000 V Range 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1 MESSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP 0 600 pu Range 0 000 ...

Страница 400: ...ons prior to flashover detection are 1 52a status 0 2 VAg VBg or VCg is greater than the pickup setting 3 IA IB IC 0 no current flows through the breaker 4 VA is greater than pickup not applicable in this scheme The conditions at flashover detection are 1 52a status 0 2 IA IB or IC is greater than the pickup current flowing through the breaker 3 VA is greater than pickup not applicable in this sch...

Страница 401: ...RK 1 STATUS CLSD A to BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C These settings specify FlexLogic operands to indicate the open status of the breaker A separate FlexLogic operand can be selected to detect individual breaker pole status and pro vide flashover detection The recommended setting is 52a breaker contact or another operand defining the breaker poles open status BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP This setting specifies a pick...

Страница 402: ...s per breaker pole that supervise the operation of the element per phase Supervision can be provided by operation of other protection elements breaker failure and close and trip commands A six cycle time delay applies after the selected FlexLogic operand resets BRK FLSHOVR PKP DELAY This setting specifies the time delay to operate after a pickup condition is detected ...

Страница 403: ...RK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV B BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV C BRK 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1 SRC BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC Enable 1 RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 6 SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 6 none VB Vb IB Block OFF 0 VA PKP FlexLogic operand On 1 FlexLogic operand Off 0 FlexLogic operand On 1 FlexLogic operand Off 0 Phase B logic Phase B logic Phase B logic Phas...

Страница 404: ...te signals representing operation of some remote current protection elements via communication chan nels can also be chosen CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 1 This setting selects the current source for input 1 The most critical protection element should also be assigned to the same source CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 1 PICKUP This setting selects the 3I_0 pickup value for input 1 the main supervised CT source CT FAIL 3I0 ...

Страница 405: ...ailure element Figure 5 137 CT FAILURE DETECTOR SCHEME LOGIC CT FAIL FUNCTION CT FAIL BLOCK CT FAIL 3IO INPUT1 CT FAIL 3IO INPUT1 PKP CT FAIL 3VO INPUT CT FAIL 3VO INPUT CT FAIL 3IO INPUT2 CT FAIL 3IO INPUT2 PKP CT FAIL PICKUP DELAY AND OR SETTING Enabled 1 SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING Off 0 SRC1 RUN 3IO PICKUP 3IO PICKUP 3VO PICKUP SRC1 RUN SRC2 RUN FLEXLOGIC OP...

Страница 406: ...current can indicate a VT fuse fail conditions These noted indications of fuse failure can also be present when faults are present on the system so a means of detecting faults and inhibiting fuse failure decla rations during these events is provided Once the fuse failure condition is declared it is sealed in until the cause that generated it disappears An additional condition is introduced to inhi...

Страница 407: ... pu SRC1 50DD OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS 2 cycles 20 cycles SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL DPO SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TIMER OPEN POLE OP The OPEN POLE OP operand applies to the D60 L60 and L90 Neutral Wire Open Detect SETTING Enabled 1 SOURCE 1 3V_0 3rd Harmonic SETTING Run 3V_0 3rd Harm setting 3 HARM PKP AND SRC1 3V0 3nd Harmonic FLEX ANALOG AND 5 cycl...

Страница 408: ...e of the entire line If shunt reactors are applied this value should be a net capacitive reactance of the line and the reactors installed between the line breakers The value is entered in secondary ohms This setting is relevant if open pole condition at the remote end of the line is to be sensed and utilized by the relay The OPEN POLE LINE XC0 setting specifies zero sequence reactance of the entir...

Страница 409: ...le is declared only after the breaker opens and current disappears If the fault evolves into a multi phase fault before the circuit breaker pole opens for the first fault the phase selector will change the fault type from a single line to ground fault to a multi phase fault thereby initiating a three pole trip The OPEN POLE DETECTION setting selects the signals used to detect an open pole conditio...

Страница 410: ... FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 1 OOS OR FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 2 A CLSD BREAKER 2 ФB CLSD BREAKER 2 ФC CLSD OR OR FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 2 OOS SETTING Open Pole Rem Current Pkp RUN IA remote Pickup IB remote Pickup IC remote Pickup TIMERS 2 cycles 2 cycles 2 cycles 2 cycles 2 cycles 2 cycles AND AND OR OR OR 837024AD CDR FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OPEN POLE REM OP A Φ OPEN POLE REM OP B Φ OPEN POLE R...

Страница 411: ...ESET Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE THERM PROT 1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE THERMAL PROTECTION 1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latched Disabled MESSAGE THERMAL PROTECTION 1 EVENTS Disabled Range Disabled Enabled OR 837038A2 CDR OR OR OR OR XOR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TRIP PHASE A PHASE A TIMER 0 5 cycles 0 ENABLED from the trip output element OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TRIP PHASE B PH...

Страница 412: ...fined as follows EQ 5 27 The IEC255 8 hot curve is defined as follows EQ 5 28 In the above equations top time to operate τop thermal protection trip time constant I measured overload RMS current Ip measured load RMS current before overload occurs k IEC 255 8 k factor applied to IB defining maximum permissible current above nominal current IB protected element base nominal current To ensure element...

Страница 413: ...hermal energy EQ 5 30 When current is less than the dropout level In 0 97 k IB the element starts decreasing the thermal energy EQ 5 31 In the above equations Δt is the power cycle duration n is the power cycle index top In is the trip time calculated at index n as per the IEC255 8 cold curve or hot curve equations trst In is the reset time calculated at index n as per the reset time equation In i...

Страница 414: ...hree phases The logic for the thermal overload protection element is shown below Figure 5 142 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION SCHEME LOGIC Table 5 34 TYPICAL TIME CONSTANTS PROTECTED EQUIPMENT TIME CONSTANT MINIMUM RESET TIME Capacitor bank 10 minutes 30 minutes Overhead line 10 minutes 20 minutes Air core reactor 40 minutes 30 minutes Busbar 60 minutes 20 minutes Underground cable 20 to 60 minutes 60...

Страница 415: ...pickup logic The permissive echo is programmed as a one shot logic The echo is sent only once and then the echo logic locks out for a settable period of time ECHO LOCKOUT setting The duration of the echo pulse does not depend on the duration or shape of the received POTT RX signal but is settable as ECHO DURATION POTT RX PICKUP DELAY This setting enables the relay to cope with spurious receive sig...

Страница 416: ...void a permanent lock up of the transmit receive loop ECHO LOCKOUT This setting defines the lockout period for the echo logic after sending the echo pulse LINE END OPEN PICKUP DELAY This setting defines the pickup setting for validation of the line end open conditions as detected by the Line Pickup logic through the LINE PICKUP LEO PKP FlexLogic operand The validated line end open condition is a r...

Страница 417: ...O DURATION TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY POTT SEAL IN DELAY AND OR AND OR AND AND AND AND AND OR 0 tRST 0 tRST tPKP tPKP tPKP 0 ECHO LOCKOUT Echo duration and lockout logic SETTINGS POTT RX1 POTT RX2 POTT RX3 POTT RX4 POTT NO OF COMM BITS Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 OR FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS POTT NO OF COMM BITS POTT TX1 POTT TX2 POTT TX3 POTT TX4 ECHO TABLE TRANSMIT TABLE Phase Selector RX RX RUN RUN FLEXLOGIC...

Страница 418: ...Range Protection AND CB Protection Only MESSAGE AR BLOCK BKR1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR CLOSE TIME BKR 1 0 10 s Range 0 00 to 655 35 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AR BKR MAN CLOSE Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR BLK TIME UPON MAN CLS 10 00 s Range 0 00 to 655 35 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AR 1P INIT Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR 3P INIT Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE...

Страница 419: ...ps of 0 01 MESSAGE AR RESET Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR RESET TIME 60 00 s Range 0 to 655 35 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AR BKR CLOSED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR PAUSE Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR INCOMPLETE SEQ TIME 5 00 s Range 0 to 655 35 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AR BLOCK BKR2 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR C...

Страница 420: ...ird and fourth shots are always three pole and start the AR 3 P DEAD TIME 2 4 timers 2 1 Pole In this mode the autorecloser starts the AR 1 P DEAD TIME for the first shot if the fault is single phase If the fault is three phase or a three pole trip on the breaker occurred during the single pole initiation the scheme goes to lockout without reclosing If two or more shots are enabled the second thir...

Страница 421: ... another phase during the single pole dead time of the auto recloser the scheme will force a 3 pole trip and reclose RECLOSING SCHEME OPERATION FOR ONE BREAKER Permanent Fault Consider Mode 1 which calls for 1 Pole or 3 Pole Time Delay 1 for the first reclosure and 3 Pole Time Delay 2 for the second reclosure and assume a permanent fault on the line Also assume the scheme is in the Reset state For...

Страница 422: ...an initiate signal the scheme moves into the reclose in progress state and starts the incomplete sequence timer The setting of this timer determines the maximum time interval allowed for a single reclose shot If a close breaker 1 or 2 signal is not present before this time expires the scheme goes to Lockout There are four other conditions that can take the scheme to the Lockout state as shown belo...

Страница 423: ...vated through the AR Mode Activation inputs explained as follows MODE 1 to MODE 4 ACTIVATION This setting selects an operand for activating the corresponding AR mode in run time Mode change via activation input takes place when only one of the four activation inputs is high and the AR RIP operand is low that is reclose is not in progress and also the mode to be activated is different from the exis...

Страница 424: ...is setting represents the dead time following the third three pole trip AR 3 P DEAD TIME 4 This setting represents the dead time following the third three pole trip AR EXTEND DEAD T 1 This setting selects an operand that will adapt the duration of the dead time for the first shot to the possibility of non simultaneous tripping at the two line ends Typically this is the operand set when the communi...

Страница 425: ...he reclosing cycle until successful the scheme will reset or unsuccessful the scheme will go to Lock out When set to Lockout the scheme will go to lockout without attempting to reclose breaker 2 AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 2 1 and Breaker 2 has failed to close When set to Continue the closing command will be transferred ...

Страница 426: ...logic sheet 3 OR AND AND OR SETTING Off 0 Bkr 3 Pole Open OR BKR 3 POLE OPEN from autoreclose logic sheet 3 AND OR SETTING Protection and CB AR Initiate Mode AND AND RESET from autoreclose logic sheet 2 CLOSE BKR1 OR BKR2 OR OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR SHOT COUNT 0 OR SETTING Off 0 Pause SHOT COUNT MAX from autoreclose logic sheet 2 SETTING Mode 2 1 Pole AR Mode Mode 3 3 Pole A Mode 4 3 Pole B OR FLEX...

Страница 427: ...ecause AR Mode equals to 1 2 3 and 4 respec tively so that it can be monitored and logged FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR RIP AND Off 0 Mode 1 Off 0 Mode 2 Off 0 Mode 3 Off 0 Mode 4 Only 1 out of 4 is high AR Mode Activation SETTING SETTING AR M0DE Mode 1 1 3 Pole Mode 2 1 Pole Mode 3 3 Pole A Mode 4 3 Pole B Mode to be activated a 1 4 Current AR Mode b 1 4 Switch to new mode Note only one mode can be activa...

Страница 428: ...BREAKER 1 CLOSED SETTING Max Number of Shots 4 3 2 1 0 maximum Increment shout count Decrement shout count Reset count OR AND FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AR SHOT CNT 4 AR SHOT CNT 3 AR SHOT CNT 2 AR SHOT CNT 1 OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR SHOT CNT 0 SHOT COUNT MAX CLOSE BKR 1 OR 2 BKR FAIL TO RECLS to Lockout RESET to autoreclose logic sheet 1 ACTUAL VALUES AR SHOT COUNT 4 AR SHOT COUNT 3 AR SHOT COUNT 2 AR SHO...

Страница 429: ...REAKER 2 ONE P OPEN BREAKER 2 CLOSED BREAKER 1 MNL CLS BREAKER 1 OOS BREAKER 2 OOS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 2 MNL CLS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR BKR MANUAL CLOSE To sheet 1 BKR CLOSED To sheet 1 and 2 BKR 3 POLE OPEN To sheet 1 BKR...

Страница 430: ...D T PROT T TRIP BKR T PROT RESET T R I P AR RIP AR 1 P RIP AR FORCE 3P TRIP CLOSE AR CLOSE BKR1 T CLOSE BKR1 T TRIP BKR T PROT RESET 3 P 2 DEAD TIME TRANSFER TIME T CLOSE BKR2 842703A4 CDR T PROT T CLOSE BKR1 RESET TIME AR RESET TIME AR SHOT COUNT 0 BREAKER 1 CLOSED AR 3P INIT AR 3P 2 RIP BREAKER 2 CLOSED AR CLOSE BKR2 AR TRANSFER TIME AR INCOMPLETE SEQ TIME 1 P DEAD TIME 1 25 cycle ...

Страница 431: ...ser settable debounce time in order for the L60 to validate the new contact state In the figure below the debounce time is set at 2 5 ms thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state mark no 1 in the diagram Once validated de bounced the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic operand and logs an event as per user setting A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that v...

Страница 432: ...filter the LOW HIGH marks no 1 2 3 and 4 in the figure below and HIGH LOW marks no 5 6 7 and 8 below transitions Figure 5 149 INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each group The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a...

Страница 433: ...ut operand will be set to on for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations and then return to off If set to Latched the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received input The self reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic equations If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in...

Страница 434: ... damage to the less robust initiating contact This can be done by monitoring an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped but this scheme is subject to incorrect oper ation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change of state and interruption of current in the trip circuit The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provi...

Страница 435: ...specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs that is when both the OPERATE and RESET signals are applied With both control inputs applied simultaneously the contact will close if set to Operate dominant and will open if set to Reset dominant Application Example 1 A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user programmable pushbuttons buttons number 1 and 2 The f...

Страница 436: ...Vista UR Setup example shown Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS OUTPUTS CONTACT OUT PUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu assuming an H4L module OUTPUT H1a OPERATE VO1 OUTPUT H1a RESET VO2 5 7 4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS PATH SETTINGS INPUTS OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 96 There are 96 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic If not assigned the ...

Страница 437: ...ion includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting and receiving devices Each transmitting device will send a GSSE GOOSE message upon a successful power up when the state of any included point changes or after a specified interval the default update time if a change of state has not occurred The transmitting device also sends a hold time which is set gr...

Страница 438: ...UserSt 32 and Dataset Item 1 through Dataset Item 32 The function of DNA inputs is defined in the IEC 61850 specification and is presented in the IEC 61850 DNA Assignments table in the Remote Outputs section The function of UserSt inputs is defined by the user selection of the FlexLogic operand whose state is represented in the GSSE GOOSE message A user must program a DNA point from the appropriat...

Страница 439: ...mote double point status input REM DPS IN 1 DEV This setting selects a remote device ID to indicate the origin of a GOOSE message The range is selected from the remote device IDs specified in the Remote Devices section REM DPS IN 1 ITEM This setting specifies the required bits of the GOOSE message The configurable GOOSE dataset items must be changed to accept a double point status item from a GOOS...

Страница 440: ... LED event indicators and the target message on the display Once set the latching mechanism will hold all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches not including FlexLogic latches to the reset state The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate Reset button a remote device via a com...

Страница 441: ...st communication exchange the input will default to Logic 1 When communication resumes the input becomes fully operational Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest Off freezes the input in case of lost communications If the latest state is not known such as after relay power up but before the first communication exchange the input will default to Logic 0 When communication resumes the input ...

Страница 442: ...ignal from downstream devices say 2 3 and 4 to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar as shown in the figure below Figure 5 152 SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME Assume that Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 is used by Devices 2 3 and 4 to block Device 1 If not blocked Device 1 would trip the bus upon detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time del...

Страница 443: ...rchitecture shown below The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission Figure 5 154 SINGLE CHANNEL OPEN LOOP CONFIGURATION In the above architecture Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly Therefore Device 2 must act as a bridge The fol lowing settings should be applied UR IED 1 DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND HYB POTT TX1 DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID 2 DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER 2 this ...

Страница 444: ...exLogic operands to be sent via the selected communications channel This allows the user to create distributed protec tion and control schemes via dedicated communications channels Some examples are directional comparison pilot schemes and direct transfer tripping It should be noted that failures of communications channels will affect teleprotection functionality The teleprotection function must b...

Страница 445: ...utputs is dependent on the number of com munication channels and terminals On two terminal two channel systems they are processed continuously on each chan nel and mapped separately per channel Therefore to achieve redundancy the user must assign the same operand on both channels teleprotection outputs at the sending end or corresponding teleprotection inputs at the receiving end On three terminal...

Страница 446: ...nt values with no units The GOOSE UNIT and PU base settings allow the user to configure GOOSE Analog so that it can be used in a FlexElement GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1 ANALOG 1 DEFAULT 1000 000 Range 1000000 000 to 1000000 000 in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE Default Value Range Default Value Last Known MESSAGE GOOSE ANALOG 1 UNITS Range up to 4 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE GOOSE ANALO...

Страница 447: ...following settings are available for each GOOSE uinteger input UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE uinteger input when the sending device is offline and the UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE is set to Default Value This setting is stored as a 32 bit unsigned integer number UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE When the sending device is offline and this setting is Last Known the value of the ...

Страница 448: ...are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5F transducer module installed in slot H The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled If Disabled no actual values are created for the chan nel An alphanumeric ID is assigned to each channel this ID will be included in the channel actual value along with the...

Страница 449: ...re automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5C transducer module installed in the first available slot The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled If Disabled there will not be an actual value created for the channel An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel this ID will be included in the channel...

Страница 450: ...50 122 119 39 157 74 131 45 10 97 60 140 123 24 165 90 138 25 11 35 70 158 127 07 174 25 145 20 11 74 80 176 130 89 182 84 152 37 12 12 90 194 134 70 191 64 159 70 12 51 100 212 138 50 200 64 167 20 12 90 110 230 142 29 209 85 174 87 13 28 120 248 146 06 219 29 182 75 13 67 130 266 149 82 228 96 190 80 14 06 140 284 153 58 238 85 199 04 14 44 150 302 157 32 248 95 207 45 14 83 160 320 161 04 259 3...

Страница 451: ...enu an exam ple for channel M5 is shown The relay checks the driving signal x in equations below for the minimum and maximum limits and subsequently re scales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as RANGE The follow ing equation is applied EQ 5 32 where x is a driving signal specified by the SOURCE setting Imin and Imax are defined by the RANG...

Страница 452: ...ystem measured via UR series relay source 1 is to be monitored by the DCmA H1 output of the range of 1 to 1 mA The following settings are applied on the relay CT ratio 1200 5 VT secondary 115 VT connection is delta and VT ratio 120 The nominal current is 800 A primary and the nominal power factor is 0 90 The power is to be monitored in both importing and exporting directions and allow for 20 overl...

Страница 453: ...d are EQ 5 41 The base unit for voltage refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details is EQ 5 42 The minimum and maximum voltage values to be monitored in pu are EQ 5 43 The following settings should be entered DCMA OUTPUT H3 SOURCE SRC 2 V_1 mag DCMA OUTPUT H3 RANGE 0 to 1 mA DCMA OUTPUT H3 MIN VAL 0 404 pu DCMA OUTPUT H3 MAX VAL 0 635 pu The limit settings differ from ...

Страница 454: ...s based inputs and outputs remain fully operational in test mode If a control action is programmed using direct inputs and outputs or remote inputs and outputs then the test procedure must take this into account When in Forcible mode the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting dictates further response of the L60 to testing conditions To force contact inputs and outputs through relay set...

Страница 455: ... across the input terminals The force contact inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs Once enabled the relay is placed into test mode allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs The Test Mode LED will be on indicating that the relay is in test mode The state of each contact input may be programmed as Dis abled Open or ...

Страница 456: ... 3 should open and contact input 4 should close Also contact output 1 should freeze contact output 2 should open contact output 3 should close and contact output 4 should remain fully opera tional The required settings are shown below To enable user programmable pushbutton 1 to initiate the test mode make the following changes in the SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE menu TEST MODE FUNCTION Enabled and T...

Страница 457: ...4 CONTACT OUTPUTS See page 6 4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS See page 6 5 AUTORECLOSE See page 6 5 REMOTE DEVICES STATUS See page 6 5 REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS See page 6 6 DIGITAL COUNTERS See page 6 6 SELECTOR SWITCHES See page 6 6 FLEX STATES See page 6 7 ETHERNET See page 6 7 REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONIZING See page 6 7 DIRECT INPUTS See page 6 8 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS See page 6 9 IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS Se...

Страница 458: ...50 GOOSE ANALOGS See page 6 19 WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 1 See page 6 20 WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 2 See page 6 20 TRANSDUCER I O DCMA INPUTS See page 6 20 TRANSDUCER I O RTD INPUTS See page 6 20 DISTANCE See page 6 20 ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS FAULT REPORTS See page 6 22 EVENT RECORDS See page 6 22 OSCILLOGRAPHY See page 6 23 DATA LOGGER See page 6 23 MAINTENANCE See page 6 24 ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO ...

Страница 459: ...ates the ID of the virtual input For example Virt Ip 1 refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual input 6 2 3 REMOTE INPUTS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE INPUTS The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been establi...

Страница 460: ...ere The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact output For example Cont Op 1 refers to the contact output in terms of the default name array index The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact output REMOTE DPS INPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUT 1 STATUS Bad Range On Off Intermediate Bad MESSAGE REMOTE DPS INPUT 2 STATUS Bad Range On Off Intermediate Bad MESS...

Страница 461: ...utput 6 2 8 AUTORECLOSE PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS AUTORECLOSE AUTORECLOSE 1 2 The automatic reclosure shot count is shown here 6 2 9 REMOTE DEVICES a STATUS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATUS The present state of the programmed remote devices is shown here The ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE message indicates whether or not all programmed remote devices are online If the corresponding state...

Страница 462: ...L COUNTERS DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1 8 The present status of the eight digital counters is shown here The status of each counter with the user defined counter name includes the accumulated and frozen counts the count units label will also appear Also included is the date and time stamp for the frozen count The COUNTER 1 MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp 6 2 11 SELEC...

Страница 463: ...zero The grandmasterIdentity code is specified by PTP to be globally unique so one can always know which clock is grandmaster in a system with multiple grandmaster capable clocks FLEX STATES PARAM 1 Off Off Range Off On MESSAGE PARAM 2 Off Off Range Off On MESSAGE PARAM 256 Off Off Range Off On ETHERNET ETHERNET PRI LINK STATUS Fail Range Fail OK MESSAGE ETHERNET SEC LINK STATUS Fail Range Fail OK...

Страница 464: ...TH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT INPUTS The AVERAGE MSG RETURN TIME is the time taken for direct output messages to return to the sender in a direct input output ring configuration this value is not applicable for non ring configurations This is a rolling average calculated for the last ten messages There are two return times for dual channel communications modules The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT values on...

Страница 465: ...s defined by the UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT setting The GOOSE integer input FlexInteger values are available for use in other L60 functions that use FlexInteger values 6 2 18 TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS TELEPROT CH TESTS The status information for two channels is shown here CHANNEL 1 STATUS This represents the receiver status of each channel If the value is OK teleprotection is ...

Страница 466: ...lay when not applicable Each time a con nection is used the remaining number of connections decrements When released the remaining number of connections increments If no connection is made over the specific protocol the number equals the maximum number available for the specific protocol For example the maximum number of Modbus TCP connections is 4 Once an EnerVista session is opened on a computer...

Страница 467: ...t B TOTAL ERRORS is a counter for total messages received with an error bad port code frame length too short MISMATCHES PORT A is a counter for total messages received with an error on Port A PRP frame but port received through and LAN ID in the frame do not match MISMATCHES PORT B is a counter for total messages received with an error on Port B PRP frame but port received through and LAN ID in th...

Страница 468: ...tive PF Lag Current Voltage WATTS Positive VARS Negative PF Lead Current Voltage WATTS Negative VARS Negative PF Lag Current Voltage WATTS Negative VARS Positive PF Lead Current Generator Generator Inductive Inductive Resistive Resistive Generator Generator UR RELAY UR RELAY UR RELAY UR RELAY G G M M G G VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 1 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 2 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 3 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 4 Q ...

Страница 469: ...ot measurable the phase angles are not referenced The phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction and are presented as negative in the lagging direction to more closely align with power system metering conventions This is illustrated below Figure 6 2 UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION c UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS The UR series of relays calculate volta...

Страница 470: ...strated in the following figure Figure 6 3 MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS ABC phase rotation ACB phase rotation Table 6 1 SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE SYSTEM VOLTAGES SEC V VT CONN RELAY INPUTS SEC V SYMM COMP SEC V VAG VBG VCG VAB VBC VCA F5AC F6AC F7AC V0 V1 V2 13 9 0 76 2 125 79 7 250 84 9 313 138 3 97 85 4 241 WYE 13 9 0 76 2 125 79 7 250 19 5 192 56 5 7 23 3 1...

Страница 471: ...PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE CURRENT SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE CURRENT SRC 1 See page 6 15 MESSAGE GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 See page 6 16 MESSAGE PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1 See page 6 16 MESSAGE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 See page 6 17 MESSAGE POWER SRC 1 See page 6 17 MESSAGE FREQUENCY SRC 1 See page 6 18 PHASE CURRENT SRC 1 SRC 1 RMS Ia 0 000 b 0 000 c 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 RMS Ia 0 000 A MESSAGE S...

Страница 472: ...ource see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES d PHASE VOLTAGE METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE VOLTAGE MESSAGE SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2 0 000 A 0 0 GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 SRC 1 RMS Ig 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Ig 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Igd 0 000 A 0 0 PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1 SRC 1 RMS Vag 0 00 V MESSAGE SRC 1 RMS Vbg 0 00 V MESSAGE SRC 1 RMS Vcg 0 00 V MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR V...

Страница 473: ... SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES f POWER METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 POWER MESSAGE SRC 1 POS SEQ V1 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2 0 000 V 0 0 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 SRC 1 RMS Vx 0 00 V MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Vx 0 000 V 0 0 POWER SRC 1 SRC 1 REAL POWER 3 0 000 W MESSAGE SRC 1 REAL POWER a 0 000 W MESSAGE SRC 1 REAL POWER b 0 000 W MESSAGE SRC 1 REAL POWER c 0 000 W ...

Страница 474: ...frequency estimation is low pass filtered The final frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and transients 6 3 3 SYNCHROCHECK PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SYNCHROCHECK SYNCHROCHECK 1 2 The actual values menu for synchrocheck 2 is identical to that of synchrocheck 1 If a synchrocheck function setting is Dis abled the corres...

Страница 475: ...er the IN and IN inputs FREQUENCY fBASE 1 Hz PHASE ANGLE BASE 360 degrees see the UR angle referencing convention POWER FACTOR PFBASE 1 00 RTDs BASE 100 C SOURCE CURRENT IBASE maximum nominal primary RMS value of the IN and IN inputs SOURCE POWER PBASE maximum value of VBASE IBASE for the IN and IN inputs SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE maximum nominal primary RMS value of the IN and IN inputs SYNCHROCHECK M...

Страница 476: ...RTD INPUTS RTD INPUT xx Actual values for each RTD input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID and the bottom line as the value 6 3 9 DISTANCE PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING DISTANCE WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 1 WATT GND FLT 1 0 000 W DCMA INPUT xx DCMA INPUT xx 0 000 mA RTD INPUT xx RTD INPUT xx 50 C DISTANCE AB LOOP RESISTANCE RAB 0 00 Ohms MESSAGE AB LOO...

Страница 477: ... distance zone count from zone 1 to zone 5 ZAG ZBG ZCG are calculated only if at least one ground distance zone is enabled otherwise all the metering quantities for ground distance impedance ZAG ZBG and ZCG are reset to zero including magnitude and angle Note that VTs of the distance source must be connected in Wye if the ground distance element is enabled MESSAGE CA LOOP IMPEDANCE ANGLE 0 00 DEG ...

Страница 478: ... the last 1024 events listed in chronological order from most recent to oldest If all 1024 event records have been filled the oldest record will be removed as a new record is added Each event record shows the event identifier sequence number cause and date time stamp associated with the event trigger Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records NO FAULTS TO REPORT or FAULT R...

Страница 479: ...records 6 4 4 DATA LOGGER PATH ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS DATA LOGGER The OLDEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time at which the oldest available samples were taken It will be static until the log gets full at which time it will start counting at the defined sampling rate The NEWEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time the most recent samples were taken It counts up at the defined sampling rate If the data log...

Страница 480: ...s Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing breaker arcing current records The BREAKER OPERATING TIME is defined as the slowest operating time of breaker poles that were initiated to open BREAKER 1 BKR 1 ARCING AMP A 0 00 kA2 cyc MESSAGE BKR 1 ARCING AMP B 0 00 kA2 cyc MESSAGE BKR 1 ARCING AMP C 0 00 kA2 cyc MESSAGE BKR 1 OPERATING TIME A 0 ms MESSAGE BKR 1 OPERATING TIME B 0 ms MESSAG...

Страница 481: ...AC ADDRESS 000000000000 Range standard Ethernet MAC address format MESSAGE MANUFACTURING DATE 0 Range YYYY MM DD HH MM SS MESSAGE OPERATING TIME 0 00 00 Range operating time in HH MM SS MESSAGE LAST SETTING CHANGE 1970 01 01 23 11 19 Range YYYY MM DD HH MM SS FIRMWARE REVISIONS UR Relay REVISION 7 2x Range 0 00 to 655 35 Revision number of the application firmware MESSAGE MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER ...

Страница 482: ...6 26 L60 Line Phase Comparison System GE Multilin 6 5 PRODUCT INFORMATION 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 ...

Страница 483: ...nd entry 7 1 2 VIRTUAL INPUTS PATH COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS The states of up to 64 virtual inputs are changed here The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input The second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input This status will be a state off logic 0 or on logic 1 COMMANDS MESSAGE COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS MESSAGE COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS MESSAGE COMMAN...

Страница 484: ...n the ENTER key is pressed When the relay is synchronizing to an external time source such as PTP IRIG B or SNTP the manually entered time is over written The timescale of the entered time is local time including daylight savings time where and when applicable COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS CLEAR FAULT REPORTS No Range No Yes CLEAR EVENT RECORDS No Range No Yes CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY No Range No Yes CLEAR DA...

Страница 485: ...ole can initiate the Reboot Relay command The SERVICE COMMAND is used to perform specific L60 service actions Presently there is only one service action available Code 101 is used to clear factory diagnostic information stored in the non volatile memory If a code other than 101 is entered the command will be ignored and no actions will be taken Various self checking diagnostics are performed in th...

Страница 486: ...Engineer Logoff Selecting Yes allows the Supervisor to forcefully logoff an engineer session Operator Logoff Selecting Yes allows the Supervisor to forcefully logoff an operator session Clear Security Data Selecting Yes allows the Supervisor to forcefully clear all the security logs and clears all the operands associated with the self tests SECURITY ADMINISTRATOR LOGOFF No Range Yes No Default No ...

Страница 487: ...formation will be included if applicable If a tar get message status changes the status with the highest priority will be displayed If a self test error is detected a message appears indicating the cause of the error For example UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed 7 2 3 RELAY SELF TESTS a DESCRIPTION The relay performs a number of self test diagno...

Страница 488: ...de stored in the L60 How often the test is performed On power up Afterwards the backplane is checked for missing cards every five sec onds What to do Check all modules against the order code ensure they are inserted properly and cycle control power If the problem persists contact the factory Latched target message No Description of problem A FlexLogic equation is incorrect How often the test is pe...

Страница 489: ...The EnerVista UR Setup software will list the valid items An IEC61850 client will also show which nodes are available for the L60 Latched target message Yes Description of problem The battery is not functioning How often the test is performed The battery is monitored every five seconds The error message displays after 60 sec onds if the problem persists What to do Replace the battery as outlined i...

Страница 490: ...mpliant The network is delivering PTP messages to the relay Latched target message No Description of problem An Ethernet connection has failed How often the test is performed Monitored every five seconds What to do Check Ethernet connections Port 1 is the primary port and port 2 is the secondary port Latched target message No Description of problem The SNTP server is not responding How often the t...

Страница 491: ... is performed when a device programmed to receive GOOSE messages stops receiving This can be from 1 to 60 seconds depending on GOOSE packets What to do Check GOOSE setup Latched target message Yes Description of problem The ambient temperature is greater than the maximum operating temperature 80 C How often the test is performed Every hour What to do Remove the L60 from service and install in a lo...

Страница 492: ... in it This data is to be used with the CPU type to know the cause of the problem e SFP X MODULE FAIL MESSAGES Description A faulty SFP or unplugging the SFP would generate this self test Type minor Target self reset Message SFP MODULE x FAIL The webpage SFP Transceiver Information described in the previous section applies for this self test as well The SFP Module Fail has higher priority and it s...

Страница 493: ...required to make this comparison 8 1 2 FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLE OF PHASE COMPARISON The basic operation of a phase comparison scheme requires that the phase angle of two or more currents be compared with each other In the case of transmission line protection these currents may originate many miles from each other so as noted above some form of communication channel is required as part of the scheme I...

Страница 494: ... SPACE block corresponds to negative current at B If we consider an internal fault as shown on the left side of Figure 8 1 the relay at A would be comparing modulated quantities illustrated in the sketches If these two signals at terminal A were to be compared as shown in Figure 8 2A over a frequency shift equipment a trip output would occur if positive current and a receiver MARK signal were both...

Страница 495: ...hat item a above is generally minimized and item b is nonexistent on external faults As shown in Figure 8 3 Stability Angle a stability angle setting of 3 ms for a 60 Hz system allows for about 65 electrical degrees of blocking zone This provides sufficient security to prevent tripping in the cases indicated above and provides reliable tripping for all types of internal faults In the event that ON...

Страница 496: ...comparison scheme is considerably more sophisticated and will be discussed in more detail subsequently However at this point it would be well to note that phase comparison on a continuous basis is not permitted mainly because it would tend to reduce the security of the scheme For this reason fault detectors are provided They initiate phase comparison only when a fault occurs on or in the general v...

Страница 497: ... time of the pos itive half cycle of current with the absence of receiver output This is initiated only when a fault is present as indicated by an output from FDH Fault Detector High set FDH is set so that it does not pick up on load current but does pick up for all faults on the protected line section Thus when a fault occurs FDH picks up and if the receiver output is not present for 3 millisecon...

Страница 498: ... during the half cycles when the SQ AMP is producing outputs the associated receiver is also pro viding an output thus preventing an AND1 output No tripping will take place 8 1 3 VARIATIONS IN PHASE COMPARISON SCHEMES There are a number of different phase comparison schemes in general use today and while all of these employ the same basic means of comparison described above significant differences...

Страница 499: ...positive sequence component of load current entering one end of the line that is 180 out of phase with that entering the other end that is the positive sequence component of load cur rent entering one end is in phase with that leaving the other end This is a non tripping situation for the phase comparison scheme The phase position of the load component relative to the fault component depends on su...

Страница 500: ...compar ison scheme that mixes the outputs of the different sequence networks in a given proportion and phase angle and then makes a phase comparison for all faults based on this mix Thus all such schemes must include positive sequence plus negative sequence and or zero sequence in order to operate for all faults The two main questions to be resolved are 1 Which sequence components should be mixed ...

Страница 501: ...tion rules should be simple enough to make the application practical As a corollary to the above point the fewest number of sequence components should be used The effects of load current must be minimized Thus negative and or zero sequence components should be weighted over the positive sequence components The limits of application should be broad enough to render the scheme useful as a protection...

Страница 502: ... phases Mho type phase distance functions have typically been employed for this protection It should be noted that distance relays designed to operate for faults involving two or more phases will operate for double phase to ground faults and also for certain close in single phase to ground faults Thus it is reasonable to expect that both the phase comparison and distance protection will be activat...

Страница 503: ...sends the center frequency It has two separate keying inputs so that it can be keyed to shift high or low MARK or SPACE from the center frequency The three frequency receiver receives all three frequencies but provides only two out puts to the relay logic the high shift and low shift outputs When the receiver receives the center frequency neither the high nor low outputs are present Here again the...

Страница 504: ...f link The ON OFF type of communication equipment is used exclusively over power line carrier links The transmitted signal is propagated along the power line between the transmitter and the remote receiver This equipment usually operate in the frequency range of 30 to 200 kHz Frequency shift equipment is available in several frequency ranges First there are those in the audio range These are gener...

Страница 505: ...nother This would not result in a workable protection scheme When power line carrier channels are used significant losses are present in the coupling equipment and the line itself Depending on these losses and the ambient noise on the line the transmitter power required may vary from about 1 to 10 watts and even more in extreme cases Consider an ON OFF tripping type of scheme as defined by Figure ...

Страница 506: ...ker schemes such as ring buses two breakers at each terminal are associated with each line so 52 b switches from each breaker are required in series 3 In multi breaker schemes one of the two breakers may be out of service but in the closed position This would require a bypass of its 52 b switch which is open Regardless of which tripping scheme is used it is obvious from Figure 8 9 that in order to...

Страница 507: ...GE Multilin L60 Line Phase Comparison System 8 15 8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8 1 OVERVIEW 8 Figure 8 11 SINGLE PHASE COMPARISON TRIPPING SCHEME Figure 8 12 SINGLE PHASE COMPARISON BLOCKING SCHEME ...

Страница 508: ...ted at an open terminal in order to permit tripping of the closed remote terminal in the event of a fault Here again the FDL logic of Figures 8 10 and 8 11 or the circuit breaker aux iliary 52 b switch could be used In general unblocking utilizes frequency shift channels because this permits monitoring of the continuous blocking signals As they are usually applied ON OFF channels do not lend thems...

Страница 509: ...the characteristics of a leased channel the local telephone company could pro vide this link over microwave cable even pilot wires or a combination of these In such cases the selection between trip ping and blocking schemes will depend on the performance of the channel as specified The same basic schemes of Figures 8 11 and 8 12 would apply h FIBER OPTICS Fiber optic communications links are quite...

Страница 510: ...ty are on opposite sides of the coin it is possible to design dual phase comparison schemes that can provide the added speed with little or no loss in security However these schemes are somewhat more complex than equivalent single phase comparison schemes Figure 8 13 illustrates the dual phase com parison tripping scheme that is the counterpart of the single phase comparison scheme of Figure 8 11 ...

Страница 511: ...continuously and when it is keyed by the negative squaring amplifier it shifts to high for the negative half cycle This scheme is simpler than that of Figure 8 13 but probably is not as secure Figure 8 14 DUAL PHASE COMPARISON BLOCKING SCHEME There does not appear to be any good purpose for a three frequency channel in dual phase comparison blocking schemes since the center frequency would not add...

Страница 512: ...es as well as received signal strength Thus this asymmetry may vary from equipment to equipment and from time to time as atmospheric conditions change in service Frequency shift channels are generally symmetrical in their response when the discriminator in the receiver is balanced If the discriminator is biased to one side or the other the receiver output tends to favor the side to which it is bia...

Страница 513: ...ay setting is made in the field to be just equal to the sum of the three delays symmetry adjustment propagation and receiver discussed above Thus with this arrangement in the scheme of Figure 8 15 an external fault would produce a output from the symmetry adjustment logic exactly in phase and symmetrical with the output of the phase delay logic This is necessary for proper blocking For internal fa...

Страница 514: ...d Low frequency and during the fault by detecting not detecting switching between Guard and Trip High fre quencies If both Trip and Guard frequencies disappear prior the fault Guard frequency i e during the fault then the relay is produces a trip within the programmable trip window time typically 150 ms after the FDH detector operates Figure 8 17 UNBLOCKING DUAL FREQUENCY PHASE COMPARISON The abov...

Страница 515: ...rminal One receiver is required for each remote transmitter because each transmitter is operated at a different frequency In order to trip a high shift output is required from both receivers concurrently to AND5 A two terminal line scheme would require only one receiver which would operate directly into AND1 without the need for AND5 Each channel has its own symmetry adjust ment Figure 8 18 TRIPPI...

Страница 516: ...er coordination between FDL and FDH at oppo site line terminals The underlying single phase model for compensation for a two and three terminal system are shown below Figure 8 19 TWO TERMINAL TRANSMISSION LINE SINGLE PHASE MODEL FOR COMPENSATION If the VTs are connected in wye the compensation is accurate for both balanced conditions that is all positive negative and zero sequence components of th...

Страница 517: ...ubject to impairments that cannot be alleviated by means of filtering but by manipulations on its shape Therefore it is logical to process the communication signals in the phase comparison relay in the time domain and adjust the reminder of the algorithms to follow the instantaneous approach not vice versa The time domain approach follows the methods of the last generation of analog phase compari ...

Страница 518: ...acy the RMS value for dependability on CT saturation or other severe transients and the waveform peak for speed EQ 8 6 The local operating current is converted into phase pulses It is important to realize that the operation is nonlinear erasing almost all information contained in the magnitude of the signal and presenting exclusively the phase information by encod ing the on off pulses signifying ...

Страница 519: ...ase and magnitude information used to detect the through fault condition The dual breaker logic consolidates two pieces of information fault detector flags signaling the rough current levels and the phase pulses signaling current direction The fault detector flags are ORed between the two breakers breakers 1 and 2 as follows FDL FDL1 OR FDL2 Where FDL1 and FDL2 are ORed mixed current signals and t...

Страница 520: ...NDITION 831804A1 CDR AND LOC 1P_RAW FDL 1 OR FDL 2 FDL 2 AND LOC 1N_RAW OR AND LOC 2P_RAW FDL 2 OR FDL 1 FDL 1 AND LOC 2N_RAW LOC P_RAW a AND LOC 1P_RAW FDL 1 FDL 2 OR LOC P_RAW b AND LOC 2P_RAW FDL 2 FDL 1 AND LOC 1P_RAW LOC 2P_RAW AND LOC 1P_RAW LOC 2N_RAW AND LOC 2P_RAW LOC 1N_RAW OR AND FDL 1 FDL 2 831805A1 CDR F1 IA F2 IB F3 IC M1 IA M2 IB M3 IC 87PC BKR 1 CURRENT 87PC BKR2 CURRENT BKR1 POS B...

Страница 521: ...have other impairments The second possible distortion is high frequency noise embedded on the mark or space pulses These should be left unal tered The receiving relay does not have any reliable information as to the real value of the received information and there fore shall not alter it based on any assumptions The phase comparison algorithm has a well understood security margin due to the averag...

Страница 522: ...d from the remote terminals with the same criticality as the local AC currents This includes monitoring for troubleshooting purposes accountability and continuous improvement capability for products and installations Modern microprocessor based phase comparison relays 831806A1 CDR TIME SENT RECEIVED ADJUSTED dt dt CORRECTING EXTENDED MARKS ASYMMETRY SETTING NEGATIVE TIME SENT RECEIVED ADJUSTED dt ...

Страница 523: ...ator or two integrators in dual comparison schemes is compared with the coincidence timer setting yielding the final trip no trip flag The following figure shows an example of the coincidence integration for an internal fault as recorded in a COMTRADE file by the relay under test Figure 8 27 TRIP INTEGRATION LOGIC RELAY COMTRADE RECORD The L60 can be programmed to perform an automatic checkback Un...

Страница 524: ...ORY OF OPERATION 8 3 Treating channel receiver inputs as analog signals and sampling the waveform at high speed enables processing of the receiver outputs that overcomes misbehaviors of the channel that fooled earlier phase comparison implementa tions as explained above ...

Страница 525: ...or fault identification Figure 8 28 SINGLE POLE OPERATION The trip output element receives requests for single and three pole trips and three pole reclose initiation which it then pro cesses to generate outputs that are used to Determine whether a single or three pole operation should be performed Initiate tripping of breaker poles A B and C either individually or as a group Initiate breaker failu...

Страница 526: ...at the remote end of the line placing the line in service Several scenarios are considered below The 87PC element must be applied according to the Single pole tripping applications section in Chapter 9 b SLG FAULT An AG fault occurs close to the considered relay Immediately after the fault the disturbance detector 50DD picks up and activates the phase selector The phase selector recognizes an AG f...

Страница 527: ...ion depending on the number of shots programmed c SLG FAULT EVOLVING INTO LLG When an AG fault occurs the events unfold initially as in the previous example If the fault evolves quickly the phase selec tor will change its initial assessment from AG to ABG fault and when the trip request is placed either by zone 1 or the line phase comparison element ANSI 87PC a three pole trip will be initiated If...

Страница 528: ...current based algo rithm for example phase angles between the zero sequence negative sequence and positive sequence voltages are used The pre fault values are subtracted prior to any calculations The pre fault quantities are captured and the calculations start when the disturbance detector 50DD operates When an open pole is declared the phase selector resets all its outputs operands and ignores an...

Страница 529: ...CT CG Asserted when a phase C to ground fault is detected PHASE SELECT AB Asserted when a phase A to B fault is detected PHASE SELECT BC Asserted when a phase B to C fault is detected PHASE SELECT CA Asserted when a phase C to A fault is detected PHASE SELECT ABG Asserted when a phase A to B to ground fault is detected PHASE SELECT BCG Asserted when a phase B to C to ground fault is detected PHASE...

Страница 530: ...fault Z positive sequence impedance of the line The currents from the local and remote systems can be parted between their fault F and pre fault load pre components EQ 8 10 and neglecting shunt parameters of the line EQ 8 11 Inserting the IA and IB equations into the VA equation and solving for the fault resistance yields EQ 8 12 Assuming the fault components of the currents IAF and IBF are in pha...

Страница 531: ...PORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION setting value is V0 and the VTs are connected in a wye configuration the fault location is performed based on the actual phase to ground voltages If the VTs are connected in a delta configuration fault location is performed based on the delta voltages and externally supplied neutral voltage EQ 8 21 If the FAULT REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION setting value is I0 and the VTs are con...

Страница 532: ...RC 50DD OP X VA or VAB VC or VCA VB or VBC 827094A5 CDR Off 0 AND FAULT LOCATOR 1 RUN 0 3 SEC ACTUAL VALUES DATE TIME FAULT TYPE FAULT LOCATION FAULT RECLOSE SHOT FAULT REPORT Vn or V_0 FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 MAG FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 ANGLE FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 MAG FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 ANGLE FAULT REPORT 1 LENGTH UNITS FAULT REPORT 1 LENGTH FAULT REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM Z0 MAG FAULT REP 1 SYS...

Страница 533: ... the balanced three phase fault which in fact occurs very rarely 87PC FDL PICKUP The main function of FDL is keying the transmitter FDL pickup must be set above the K I_1 output of the mixing network for the maximum expected load The recommended FDL setting is as follows FDL 1 1 K I1L where I1L is the maximum line load current and K is a mixed signal factor as described above Higher margin may be ...

Страница 534: ...rresponding current to the relays which in turn key the PLC and consequently measure MARK and SPACE signals on the oscillography Moving cursors and measuring an average from a few points time the user can determine and enter setting 87PC PHASE DELAY CH1 AND 87PC PHASE DELAY CH2 These settings are made in the field to be equal to the sum of three delays symmetry adjustment propagation time of the l...

Страница 535: ...ble to the 2TL BL DPC 2FL scheme only The typical setting is 150 ms 9 1 3 SETTINGS EXAMPLE Consider settings for a single circuit 765 kV line 100 miles length 50 ohms primary impedance 5520 ohms shunt capaci tance of the line maximum expected load of 2000 A CT ratio 2000 5 minimum expected internal three phase fault is 8000 A Figure 9 1 SETTINGS EXAMPLE 1 Mixed signal factor K 0 2 2 FDL pickup IFD...

Страница 536: ...the backup ground distance and the zero sequence compensation term is also not accurate so that the positive sequence reach setting must be increased to com pensate The phase distance reach setting may also have to be increased to cope with a transfer across the two transform ers but this is dependent on the termination and configuration of the parallel line Three terminal line applications genera...

Страница 537: ... used to prevent maloperation of the L60 protection system during faults on the LV side of the transformer s As explained earlier the distance elements should be set to overreach all line terminals and at the same time safely underreach the LV busbars of all the tapped transformers This may present some challenges particularly for long lines and large transformer tapped close to the substations If...

Страница 538: ...D Where tractional load is tapped form the line protected by L60 significant and variable negative sequence current may exist on the line thereby not allowing sensitive FDL and FDH settings On such lines it is beneficial to detect faults based on change in the sequence components of the currents Again FlexElements can be used for such an application Figure 9 5 USING FLEXELEMENTS TO DETECT CHANGES ...

Страница 539: ...k is performed to ensure a minimum 20 margin in sensitivity for both FDL and FDH detectors at all terminals according to the operating quantity formula for all system configurations 3 If there is not enough margin in sensitivity then steps must be taken to provide carrier start and trip permission It is preferable to employ built in functionality as it provides reliable and deterministic coordinat...

Страница 540: ...not interrupted by the breaker Therefore mapping the 87PC function directly to the trip output will always cause a three pole trip To avoid this simple logic see example shown must be imple mented and mapped to the TRIP 1 POLE Input The virtual output 87PC TRIPOUT VO45 operates when single pole tripping occurs and is mapped to the TRIP 1 POLE Input To avoid forcing a three pole trip virtual output...

Страница 541: ...ditions and blocking the distance elements to using it and accepting the fact that the distance protection will not respond to subsequent internal faults until the problem is addressed To be fully operational the Fuse Failure element must be enabled and its output FlexLogic operand must be indi cated as the blocking signal for the selected protection elements For convenience the current supervisio...

Страница 542: ...h unless the reach is reduced significantly sometimes as low as 65 of the line length If the line being protected does not have a significant interaction with an adja cent circuit then the typical 80 setting may be used If there is significant mutual coupling between the parallel lines then the mutual compensation feature of the ground distance elements can be used instead of a drastic reduction i...

Страница 543: ...oduced during external faults when power line carrier is utilized as the communications medium No current reversal logic is included for the overreaching phase and ground distance elements because long reaches are not usually required for two terminal lines A situation can occur however where the ground distance element will have an extended reach This situation is encountered when it is desired t...

Страница 544: ...ns with fault and system parameters no solid setting recommendations are given with respect to extra security margin for sub synchronous oscillations It is strongly rec ommended to use a power system simulator to verify the reach settings or to use an adaptive L60 feature for dynamic reach control If the adaptive reach control feature is used the PHS DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL setting shall be set accordi...

Страница 545: ...wer cycle and the NEG local pulses at the negative half of the power cycle are present in oscillography once the operating current is greater than 0 02 pu When the 87PC BRK1 operating current or 87PC BRK2 current for two breaker applications exceeds the FDL pickup setting the BRK1 FDL and BRK2 FDL for two breaker applications flags are asserted indicating a fault condition and thus initiating tran...

Страница 546: ...NAL PROCESSING As shown in the oscillography an external fault occurs on the breaker and a half diameter where the F CT VT module is fed from the Breaker 1 CT and the M CT VT module is fed from the Breaker 2 CT The positive and negative halves of the waveform are opposite at two CTs Operating in tripping mode the L60 detects this condition and transmits only when pos itive samples from both CTs ar...

Страница 547: ... screw has been removed as shown below This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal The new wide angle hinge assembly in the enhanced front panel opens completely and allows easy access to all modules in the L60 Figure 10 1 UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION ENHANCED FACEPLATE The standard faceplate can be opened to the left once the sliding latch on the right side has been pus...

Страница 548: ...e the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis engage the clips simultaneously When the clips have locked into position the module will be fully inserted CPU connections must be individually disconnected from the module before the module can be removed from the chassis The new CT VT modules can only be used with new CPUs similarly old CT VT modules can only be used with old CPUs In the ev...

Страница 549: ...rewing the panel enhanced front panel 4 For the standard front panel it needs to be removed in order to access the power supply module which is typically in the first slot on the left side and blocked by the hinge of the front panel To remove the front panel unscrew the bracket on the front left side of the unit 5 Simultaneously pull the ejector clips at the top and bottom of the power supply modu...

Страница 550: ...ide and blocked by the hinge of the front panel To remove the front panel unscrew the bracket on the front left side of the unit 5 Simultaneously pull the ejector clips at the top and bottom of the power supply module and remove the module 6 Unscrew all four screws not three that attach the metal cover to the module 7 Slide the metal cover away from the clips about 1 cm 1 4 inch and remove the cov...

Страница 551: ...α μπαταρία που δεν πρέπει να απορρίπτεται σε δημόσια συστήματα απόρριψης στην Ευρωπαϊκή Κοινότητα είτε την τεκμηρίωση του προϊόντος για συγκεκριμένες πληροφορίες που αφορούν τη μπαταρία Η μπαταρία είναι φέρει σήμανση με αυτό το σύμβολο το οποίο μπορεί να περιλαμβάνει γράμματα για να δηλώσουν το κάδμιο Cd τον μόλυβδο Pb ή τον υδράργυρο Hg Για την κατάλληλη ανακύκλωση επιστρέψτε την μπαταρία στον πρ...

Страница 552: ...ri Dette produkt inneholder et batteri som ikke kan kastes med usortert kommunalt søppel i den Europeiske Unionen Se produktdokumentasjonen for spesifikk batteriinformasjon Batteriet er merket med dette symbolet som kan inkludere symboler for å indikere at kadmium Cd bly Pb eller kvikksølv Hg forekommer Returner batteriet til leverandøren din eller til et dedikert oppsamlingspunkt for korrekt gjen...

Страница 553: ... avsedd deponering För mer information se www recyclethis info TR Pil Geri Dönüşümü Bu ürün Avrupa Birliği genel atık sistemlerine atılmaması gereken pil içermektedir Daha detaylı pil bilgisi için ürünün kataloğunu inceleyiniz Bu sembolle işaretlenmiş piller Kadmiyum Cd Kurşun Pb ya da Civa Hg içerebilir Doğru geri dönüşüm için ürünü yerel tedarikçinize geri veriniz ya da özel işaretlenmiş toplama...

Страница 554: ...10 8 L60 Line Phase Comparison System GE Multilin 10 2 BATTERIES 10 MAINTENANCE 10 ...

Страница 555: ...gle Amps Source 1 zero sequence current angle 6172 SRC 1 I_1 Mag Degrees Source 1 positive sequence current magnitude 6174 SRC 1 I_1 Angle Amps Source 1 positive sequence current angle 6175 SRC 1 I_2 Mag Degrees Source 1 negative sequence current magnitude 6177 SRC 1 I_2 Angle Amps Source 1 negative sequence current angle 6178 SRC 1 Igd Mag Degrees Source 1 differential ground current magnitude 61...

Страница 556: ...SRC 3 I_1 Angle Amps Source 3 positive sequence current angle 6303 SRC 3 I_2 Mag Degrees Source 3 negative sequence current magnitude 6305 SRC 3 I_2 Angle Amps Source 3 negative sequence current angle 6306 SRC 3 Igd Mag Degrees Source 3 differential ground current magnitude 6308 SRC 3 Igd Angle Amps Source 3 differential ground current angle 6336 SRC 4 Ia RMS Amps Source 4 phase A current RMS 6338...

Страница 557: ... Vx Angle Degrees Source 1 auxiliary voltage angle 6691 SRC 1 V_0 Mag Volts Source 1 zero sequence voltage magnitude 6693 SRC 1 V_0 Angle Degrees Source 1 zero sequence voltage angle 6694 SRC 1 V_1 Mag Volts Source 1 positive sequence voltage magnitude 6696 SRC 1 V_1 Angle Degrees Source 1 positive sequence voltage angle 6697 SRC 1 V_2 Mag Volts Source 1 negative sequence voltage magnitude 6699 SR...

Страница 558: ...ude 6807 SRC 3 Vab Angle Degrees Source 3 phase AB voltage angle 6808 SRC 3 Vbc Mag Volts Source 3 phase BC voltage magnitude 6810 SRC 3 Vbc Angle Degrees Source 3 phase BC voltage angle 6811 SRC 3 Vca Mag Volts Source 3 phase CA voltage magnitude 6813 SRC 3 Vca Angle Degrees Source 3 phase CA voltage angle 6814 SRC 3 Vx RMS Volts Source 3 auxiliary voltage RMS 6816 SRC 3 Vx Mag Volts Source 3 aux...

Страница 559: ...phase C real power 7176 SRC 1 Q Vars Source 1 three phase reactive power 7178 SRC 1 Qa Vars Source 1 phase A reactive power 7180 SRC 1 Qb Vars Source 1 phase B reactive power 7182 SRC 1 Qc Vars Source 1 phase C reactive power 7184 SRC 1 S VA Source 1 three phase apparent power 7186 SRC 1 Sa VA Source 1 phase A apparent power 7188 SRC 1 Sb VA Source 1 phase B apparent power 7190 SRC 1 Sc VA Source ...

Страница 560: ...b Vars Source 4 phase B reactive power 7278 SRC 4 Qc Vars Source 4 phase C reactive power 7280 SRC 4 S VA Source 4 three phase apparent power 7282 SRC 4 Sa VA Source 4 phase A apparent power 7284 SRC 4 Sb VA Source 4 phase B apparent power 7286 SRC 4 Sc VA Source 4 phase C apparent power 7288 SRC 4 PF Source 4 three phase power factor 7289 SRC 4 Phase A PF Source 4 phase A power factor 7290 SRC 4 ...

Страница 561: ...mA DCmA input 2 actual value 13508 DCmA Inputs 3 Value mA DCmA input 3 actual value 13510 DCmA Inputs 4 Value mA DCmA input 4 actual value 13512 DCmA Inputs 5 Value mA DCmA input 5 actual value 13514 DCmA Inputs 6 Value mA DCmA input 6 actual value 13516 DCmA Inputs 7 Value mA DCmA input 7 actual value 13518 DCmA Inputs 8 Value mA DCmA input 8 actual value 13520 DCmA Inputs 9 Value mA DCmA input 9...

Страница 562: ...t 26 actual value 13578 RTD Inputs 27 Value RTD input 27 actual value 13579 RTD Inputs 28 Value RTD input 28 actual value 13580 RTD Inputs 29 Value RTD input 29 actual value 13581 RTD Inputs 30 Value RTD input 30 actual value 13582 RTD Inputs 31 Value RTD input 31 actual value 13583 RTD Inputs 32 Value RTD input 32 actual value 13584 RTD Inputs 33 Value RTD input 33 actual value 13585 RTD Inputs 3...

Страница 563: ...76 FlexElement 5 Value FlexElement 5 actual value 39178 FlexElement 6 Value FlexElement 6 actual value 39180 FlexElement 7 Value FlexElement 7 actual value 39182 FlexElement 8 Value FlexElement 8 actual value 39184 FlexElement 9 Value FlexElement 9 actual value 39186 FlexElement 10 Value FlexElement 10 actual value 39188 FlexElement 11 Value FlexElemen 11 actual value 39190 FlexElement 12 Value Fl...

Страница 564: ...DRESS FLEXINTEGER NAME UNITS DESCRIPTION 9968 GOOSE UInt Input 1 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 1 9970 GOOSE UInt Input 2 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 2 9972 GOOSE UInt Input 3 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 3 9974 GOOSE UInt Input 4 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 4 9976 GOOSE UInt Input 5 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 5 9978 GOOSE UInt Input 6 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 6 9980 GOOSE UInt Input 7...

Страница 565: ...TX or 100Base FX B 1 3 DATA LINK LAYER Modbus RTU communications takes place in packets that are groups of asynchronously framed byte data The master transmits a packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet The following information describes the general for mat for both transmit and receive packets For details on packet formatting see subsequent sections describing each func tion code...

Страница 566: ...ponse the transaction identifier of the request Protocol Identifier Used for intra system multiplexing The Modbus protocol is identified by the value 0 Length The length field is a byte count of the following fields including the Unit Identifier and data fields Unit Identifier For the purposes of the UR this field is equivalent to the Modbus RTU SLAVE ADDRESS field The client must use the same val...

Страница 567: ...er of data bytes Di i th data byte i 0 to N 1 G 16 bit characteristic polynomial 1010000000000001 binary with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed shr x right shift operator th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag a 0 is shifted into the MSbit of x all other bits are shifted right one location ALGORITHM 1 FFFF hex A 2 0 i 3 0 j 4 Di Alow Alow 5 j 1 j 6 shr A 7 Is there a carry No go to 8 Yes G ...

Страница 568: ... read Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical The following table shows the format of the master and slave packetsin Modbus RTU Modbus TCP IP ADUs have a MBAP instead of slave address and CRC is in another stack layer The example shows a master device requesting three register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h 17 decimal the slave device responds with the values 40 ...

Страница 569: ...0 at memory map address 4051h to slave device 11h 17 dec Table B 5 MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE HEX PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE HEX SLAVE ADDRESS 11 SLAVE ADDRESS 11 FUNCTION CODE 05 FUNCTION CODE 05 OPERATION CODE high 00 OPERATION CODE high 00 OPERATION CODE low 01 OPERATION CODE low 01 CODE VALUE high FF CODE VALUE high F...

Страница 570: ...the function code set to 1 The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets in Modbus RTU Modbus TCP IP ADUs have a MBAP instead of slave address and CRC is in another stack layer The example shows a master device sending the unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11h Table B 8 MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET ...

Страница 571: ... specific file transfer information so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus connections b OTHER PROTOCOLS All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols for example TFTP or MMS c COMTRADE OSCILLOGRAPHY AND DATA LOGGER FILES Oscillography and data logger files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEE...

Страница 572: ...TXT replace nnn with the desired starting record number To read from a specific record to another specific record use the following filename EVT TXT xxxxx yyyyy replace xxxxx with the starting record number and yyyyy with the ending record number g READING FAULT REPORT FILES Fault report data has been available via the L60 file retrieval mechanism since UR firmware version 2 00 The file name is fa...

Страница 573: ...er 8 items F203 none Product Information Read Only Written by Factory 0110 FPGA Version F206 none 0113 FPGA Date 0 to 4294967295 1 F050 0 Product Information Read Write 0120 Undefined 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Self Test Targets Read Only 0200 Self Test States 4 items 0 to 4294967295 0 1 F143 0 Front Panel Read Only 0208 LED Column n State n 1 to 10 10 items 0 to 65535 1 F501 0 0220 Display Message F204 none...

Страница 574: ...29 Virtual Input 42 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042A Virtual Input 43 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042B Virtual Input 44 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042C Virtual Input 45 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042D Virtual Input 46 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042E Virtual Input 47 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042F Virtual Input 48 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0430 Virtual Input 49 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0431 Virtual Input...

Страница 575: ...4 05E4 Repeated for Binary Input 25 05E8 Repeated for Binary Input 26 05EC Repeated for Binary Input 27 05F0 Repeated for Binary Input 28 05F4 Repeated for Binary Input 29 05F8 Repeated for Binary Input 30 05FC Repeated for Binary Input 31 0600 Repeated for Binary Input 32 0604 Repeated for Binary Input 33 0608 Repeated for Binary Input 34 060C Repeated for Binary Input 35 0610 Repeated for Binary...

Страница 576: ...or Binary Input 82 06CC Repeated for Binary Input 83 06D0 Repeated for Binary Input 84 06D4 Repeated for Binary Input 85 06D8 Repeated for Binary Input 86 06DC Repeated for Binary Input 87 06E0 Repeated for Binary Input 88 06E4 Repeated for Binary Input 89 06E8 Repeated for Binary Input 90 06EC Repeated for Binary Input 91 06F0 Repeated for Binary Input 92 06F4 Repeated for Binary Input 93 06F8 Re...

Страница 577: ...103 ASDU 1 Analog Offset 9 32768 to 32767 1 F002 0 0723 Repeated for IEC103 ASDU 2 0742 Repeated for IEC103 ASDU 3 0761 Repeated for IEC103 ASDU 4 IEC103 Commands Read Write Setting 32 Modules 0780 IEC103 Command 1 FUN 0 to 255 1 F001 0 0781 IEC103 Command 1 INF 0 to 255 1 F001 0 0782 IEC103 Command 1 Param ON 0 to 64 1 F631 0 OFF 0783 IEC103 Command 1 Param OFF 0 to 64 1 F631 0 OFF 0784 Repeated ...

Страница 578: ...of Targets 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 Element Targets Read Write 14E2 Target to Read 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 Element Targets Read Only 14E3 Target Message F200 Contact Input Output States Read Only 1500 Contact Input States 6 items 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 1508 Virtual Input States 8 items 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 1510 Contact Output States 4 items 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 1518 Contact Output Current States 4 items 0 to 65...

Страница 579: ...Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 180B Source 1 Phase B Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 180D Source 1 Phase B Current Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 180E Source 1 Phase C Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 1810 Source 1 Phase C Current Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 1811 Source 1 Neutral Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 1813 Source 1 Neutr...

Страница 580: ...nitude 0 to 999999 999 V 0 001 F060 0 1A28 Source 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 1A29 Source 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 V 0 001 F060 0 1A2B Source 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 1A2C Reserved 20 items F001 0 1A40 Repeated for Source 2 1A80 Repeated for Source 3 1AC0 Repeated for Source 4 1B00 Repeated for ...

Страница 581: ... F300 0 21A6 Breaker Flashover 1 Supervision Phase B 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 21A8 Breaker Flashover 1 Supervision Phase C 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 21AA Breaker Flashover 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 21AC Breaker Flashover 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 21AD Breaker Flashover 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self Reset 21AE Reserved 4 items F001 0 21B2 Repeated for breaker flashover 2 Breaker Arcin...

Страница 582: ... 1 Prefault Phase C Current Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 2349 Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 V 0 001 F060 0 234B Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Voltage Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 234C Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 V 0 001 F060 0 234E Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Voltage Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 234F Fault 1 Prefault Phase C ...

Страница 583: ...612 0 26D2 IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 3 Operand F612 0 26D3 IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 4 Operand F612 0 26D4 IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 5 Operand F612 0 26D5 IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 6 Operand F612 0 26D6 IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 7 Operand F612 0 26D7 IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 8 Operand F612 0 26D8 IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 9 Operand F612 0 26D9 IEC 61850 GGIO5 ui...

Страница 584: ...to 32767 1 F001 0 Fault Report Indexing Read Only Non Volatile 3020 Number of Fault Reports 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 Fault Report Actuals Read Only Non Volatile 15 Modules 3030 Fault Report 1 Time 0 to 4294967295 1 F050 0 3032 Fault Report 2 Time 0 to 4294967295 1 F050 0 3034 Fault Report 3 Time 0 to 4294967295 1 F050 0 3036 Fault Report 4 Time 0 to 4294967295 1 F050 0 3038 Fault Report 5 Time 0 to 429...

Страница 585: ...rity Read Write Setting 3329 Session Lockout 0 to 99 1 F001 3 332A Session Lockout Period 0 to 9999 min 1 F001 3 332B Load Factory Defaults 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No 332C Syslog Server IP Address 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 332E Syslog Server Port Number 1 to 65535 1 F001 514 Security Supervisory Read Write Setting 3331 Device Authentication Enable 0 to 1 1 F126 1 Yes 3332 Supervisor Role Enable 0 to 1 1 F1...

Страница 586: ...to 9999999 1 F004 0 34E4 DCmA Inputs 19 Value 9999999 to 9999999 1 F004 0 34E6 DCmA Inputs 20 Value 9999999 to 9999999 1 F004 0 34E8 DCmA Inputs 21 Value 9999999 to 9999999 1 F004 0 34EA DCmA Inputs 22 Value 9999999 to 9999999 1 F004 0 34EC DCmA Inputs 23 Value 9999999 to 9999999 1 F004 0 34EE DCmA Inputs 24 Value 9999999 to 9999999 1 F004 0 RTD Input Values Read Only 48 Modules 34F0 RTD Input 1 V...

Страница 587: ...8 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 351E RTD Input 47 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 351F RTD Input 48 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 Ohm Input Values Read Only 2 Modules 3520 Ohm Inputs 1 Value 0 to 65535 Ohm 1 F001 0 3521 Ohm Inputs 2 Value 0 to 65535 Ohm 1 F001 0 Expanded Direct Input Output Status Read Only 3560 Direct Device States one per register 8 items 0 to 1 1 F155 0 Offline 3570 Direct Input States...

Страница 588: ... 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 4029 Setting Password Status 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled Passwords Read Write Setting 402A Command Password Access Timeout 5 to 480 min 1 F001 5 402B Setting Password Access Timeout 5 to 480 min 1 F001 30 402C Invalid Password Attempts 2 to 5 1 F001 3 402D Password Lockout Duration 5 to 60 min 1 F001 5 Passwords Read Write 402E Password Access Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled...

Страница 589: ...dress 0 to 65519 1 F001 1 40AD Ethernet Operation Mode 0 to 1 1 F192 1 Half Duplex 40AE DNP Current Scale Factor 0 to 8 1 F194 2 1 40AF DNP Voltage Scale Factor 0 to 8 1 F194 2 1 40B0 DNP Power Scale Factor 0 to 8 1 F194 2 1 40B1 DNP Energy Scale Factor 0 to 8 1 F194 2 1 40B2 DNP Power Scale Factor 0 to 8 1 F194 2 1 40B3 DNP Other Scale Factor 0 to 8 1 F194 2 1 40B4 DNP Current Default Deadband 0 ...

Страница 590: ...NP Object 2 Default Variation 1 to 3 1 F001 2 4142 DNP Object 20 Default Variation 0 to 3 1 F523 0 1 4143 DNP Object 21 Default Variation 0 to 3 1 F524 0 1 4144 DNP Object 22 Default Variation 0 to 3 1 F523 0 1 4145 DNP Object 23 Default Variation 0 to 3 1 F523 0 1 4146 DNP Object 30 Default Variation 1 to 5 1 F001 1 4147 DNP Object 32 Default Variation 0 to 5 1 F525 0 1 4148 SCADA Protocol 0 to 2...

Страница 591: ...65535 1 F600 0 4200 Oscillography Digital Channel n 63 items 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 Trip and Alarm LEDs Read Write Setting 42B0 Trip LED Input FlexLogic Operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 42B2 Alarm LED Input FlexLogic Operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 User Programmable LEDs Read Write Setting 48 Modules 42C0 FlexLogic Operand to Activate LED 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 42C2 User LED type latched or s...

Страница 592: ...t B 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 436B Total Errors 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 IPv4 Route Table Read Write Setting 6 Modules 4370 IPv4 Network Route 1 Destination 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 56554706 4372 IPv4 Network Route 1 Netmask 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 56554706 4374 IPv4 Network Route 1 Gateway 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 56554706 4376 Repeated for Route 2 437C Repeated for Route 3 4382 Repeated for Route 4 43...

Страница 593: ... CT 0 to 63 1 F400 0 4585 Source 1 Phase VT 0 to 63 1 F400 0 4586 Source 1 Auxiliary VT 0 to 63 1 F400 0 4587 Repeated for Source 2 458E Repeated for Source 3 4595 Repeated for Source 4 459C Repeated for Source 5 45A3 Repeated for Source 6 Power System Read Write Setting 4600 Nominal Frequency 25 to 60 Hz 1 F001 60 4601 Phase Rotation 0 to 1 1 F106 0 ABC 4602 Frequency And Phase Reference 0 to 5 1...

Страница 594: ... Repeated for User Definable Display 3 4C60 Repeated for User Definable Display 4 4C80 Repeated for User Definable Display 5 4CA0 Repeated for User Definable Display 6 4CC0 Repeated for User Definable Display 7 4CE0 Repeated for User Definable Display 8 4D00 Repeated for User Definable Display 9 4D20 Repeated for User Definable Display 10 4D40 Repeated for User Definable Display 11 4D60 Repeated f...

Страница 595: ...nput 39 560C Repeated for RTD Input 40 5620 Repeated for RTD Input 41 5734 Repeated for RTD Input 42 5748 Repeated for RTD Input 43 575C Repeated for RTD Input 44 5770 Repeated for RTD Input 45 5784 Repeated for RTD Input 46 5798 Repeated for RTD Input 47 57AC Repeated for RTD Input 48 Flexlogic Timers Read Write Setting 32 Modules 5800 FlexLogic Timer 1 Type 0 to 2 1 F129 0 millisecond 5801 FlexL...

Страница 596: ...7295 1 F300 0 590F Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 5910 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 5911 Reserved 3 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 5914 Repeated for Phase Time Overcurrent 2 5928 Repeated for Phase Time Overcurrent 3 593C Repeated for Phase Time Overcurrent 4 5950 Repeated for Phase Time Overcurrent 5 5964 Repeated for Phase Time Overcurrent 6 Phase I...

Страница 597: ...Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 0 5C05 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 5C07 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 5C08 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 5C09 Reserved 8 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 5C11 Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 5C22 Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous...

Страница 598: ...5E28 Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 9 5E39 Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 10 5E4A Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 11 5E5B Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 12 CT Fail Read Write Setting 6 Modules 5E6C CT Fail 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 5E6D CT Fail 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 5E6F CT Fail 1 Current Source 1 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1...

Страница 599: ...uence Current Rate of Change High Seal in 0 to 10 s 0 001 F001 200 6097 Positive sequence Current Rate of Change Supervision 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6099 Positive sequence Current Rate of Change Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 609B Positive sequence Current Rate of Change Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 609C Positive sequence Current Rate of Change Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset Phase Compariso...

Страница 600: ...PC High Speed Contact 1 0 to 64 1 F490 0 610B 87PC High Speed Contact 2 0 to 64 1 F490 0 610C 87PC FDL AUX 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 610E 87PC FDH AUX 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6110 87PC Reset Delay 0 to 200 ms 1 F001 30 6111 87PC Mixed Signal Reference Angle 0 to 359 1 F001 0 6112 87PC Trip Security 0 to 1 1 F534 0 First Coincidence 6113 87PC Second Coincidence Timer 10 to 200 ms 1 F001 40 6114 87P...

Страница 601: ... 65C3 Power Swing Detect Supervision 0 05 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 600 65C4 Power Swing Detect Forward Reach 0 1 to 500 ohms 0 01 F001 5000 65C5 Power Swing Detect Forward RCA 40 to 90 degrees 1 F001 75 65C6 Power Swing Detect Reverse Reach 0 1 to 500 ohms 0 01 F001 5000 65C7 Power Swing Detect Reverse RCA 40 to 90 degrees 1 F001 75 65C8 Power Swing Detect Outer Limit Angle 40 to 140 degrees 1 F001 120...

Страница 602: ... Pole Input2 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6771 Trip 1 Pole Input3 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6773 Trip 1 Pole Input4 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6775 Trip 1 Pole Input5 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6777 Trip 1 Pole Input6 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6779 Trip Reclose Input1 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 677B Trip Reclose Input2 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 677D Trip Reclose Input3 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 677F Trip Reclos...

Страница 603: ...Autoreclose 3 Pole Dead Time 1 0 to 655 35 s 0 01 F001 50 6876 Autoreclose 3 Pole Dead Time 2 0 to 655 35 s 0 01 F001 120 6877 Autoreclose Extend Dead T1 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6879 Autoreclose Dead T1 Extension 0 to 655 35 s 0 01 F001 50 687A Autoreclose Reset 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 687C Autoreclose Reset Time 0 to 655 35 s 0 01 F001 6000 687D Autoreclose Breaker Closed 0 to 4294967295 1 F300...

Страница 604: ...d for Phase Overvoltage 3 Phase Distance Read Write Grouped Setting 5 Modules 7070 Phase Distance Zone 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 7071 Phase Distance Zone 1 Current Supervision 0 05 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 200 7072 Phase Distance Zone 1 Reach 0 02 to 500 ohms 0 01 F001 200 7073 Phase Distance Zone 1 Direction 0 to 2 1 F154 0 Forward 7074 Phase Distance Zone 1 Comparator Limit 30 to 90 degrees...

Страница 605: ...geneous Angle 40 to 40 degrees 0 1 F002 0 7148 Ground Distance Zone 1 POL Current 0 to 1 1 F521 0 Zero seq 7149 Ground Distance Zone 1 Reverse Reach 0 02 to 500 ohms 0 01 F001 200 717A Ground Distance Zone 1 Reverse Reach RCA 30 to 90 degrees 1 F001 85 714B Reserved 7 items 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 7152 Repeated for Ground Distance Zone 2 7174 Repeated for Ground Distance Zone 3 Line Pickup Read Write ...

Страница 606: ...equence Directional Overcurrent 1 Source 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 7262 Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Type 0 to 1 1 F179 0 Neg Sequence 7263 Neg Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward ECA 0 to 90 Lag 1 F002 75 7264 Neg Seq Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Limit Angle 40 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90 7265 Neg Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Pickup 0 015 to 30 pu 0 05 F001 5 7266...

Страница 607: ...module number 6 755A Repeated for module number 7 7579 Repeated for module number 8 7598 Repeated for module number 9 75B7 Repeated for module number 10 75D6 Repeated for module number 11 75F5 Repeated for module number 12 7614 Repeated for module number 13 7633 Repeated for module number 14 7652 Repeated for module number 15 7671 Repeated for module number 16 7690 Repeated for module number 17 76...

Страница 608: ...4967295 1 F300 0 7B8F User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Hold 0 to 10 s 0 1 F001 1 7B90 Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 2 7BC0 Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 3 7BF0 Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 4 7C20 Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 5 7C50 Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 6 7C80 Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 7 7CB0 Repeated for User Prog...

Страница 609: ...1 F001 300 7F03 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 100 7F04 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 100 7F05 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 7F07 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 7F08 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 7F09 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Curves 0 to 3 1 F116 0 Definite Time 7F0A Reserved 8 it...

Страница 610: ...lure 1 Phase Amp Supv Pickup 0 001 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 1050 860A Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Supv Pickup 0 001 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 1050 860B Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 1 0 to 1 1 F126 1 Yes 860C Breaker Failure 1 Timer 1 Pickup 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 0 860D Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 2 0 to 1 1 F126 1 Yes 860E Breaker Failure 1 Timer 2 Pickup 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 0 860F Breaker Failure 1...

Страница 611: ...epeated for Digital Element 4 8A58 Repeated for Digital Element 5 8A6E Repeated for Digital Element 6 8A84 Repeated for Digital Element 7 8A9A Repeated for Digital Element 8 8AB0 Repeated for Digital Element 9 8AC6 Repeated for Digital Element 10 8ADC Repeated for Digital Element 11 8AF2 Repeated for Digital Element 12 8B08 Repeated for Digital Element 13 8B1E Repeated for Digital Element 14 8B34 ...

Страница 612: ...d for Trip Bus 4 8F98 Repeated for Trip Bus 5 8FCA Repeated for Trip Bus 6 FlexElement Read Write Setting 16 Modules 9000 FlexElement 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 9001 FlexElement 1 Name F206 FxE 1 9004 FlexElement 1 InputP 0 to 65535 1 F600 0 9005 FlexElement 1 InputM 0 to 65535 1 F600 0 9006 FlexElement 1 Compare 0 to 1 1 F516 0 LEVEL 9007 FlexElement 1 Input 0 to 1 1 F515 0 SIGNED 9008 F...

Страница 613: ...Fault REM2 TAP Z1 Magnitude 0 01 to 250 ohms 0 01 F001 300 9210 Fault REM2 TAP Z1 Angle 25 to 90 degrees 1 F001 75 9511 Fault REM2 TAP Length 0 to 2000 0 1 F001 1000 DCmA Outputs Read Write Setting 24 Modules 9360 DCmA Output 1 Source 0 to 65535 1 F600 0 9361 DCmA Output 1 Range 0 to 2 1 F522 0 1 to 1 mA 9362 DCmA Output 1 Minimum 90 to 90 pu 0 001 F004 0 9364 DCmA Output 1 Maximum 90 to 90 pu 0 0...

Страница 614: ...or Direct Input Output 27 9544 Repeated for Direct Input Output 28 9550 Repeated for Direct Input Output 29 955C Repeated for Direct Input Output 30 9568 Repeated for Direct Input Output 31 9574 Repeated for Direct Input Output 32 IEC 61850 Received Integers Read Write Setting 16 Modules 98A0 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 1 Default Value 0 to 429496295 1 F003 1000 98A2 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger Input 1 Mo...

Страница 615: ...twork Status 0 to 2 1 F134 2 n a 9AAF Teleprotection Channel 1 Input States 0 to 1 1 F500 0 9AB0 Teleprotection Channel 2 Input States 0 to 1 1 F500 0 9AC0 Teleprotection Input 1 States 1 per register 16 items 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 9AD0 Teleprotection Input 2 States 1 per register 16 items 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off Charge Current Compensation Settings Read Write 9EF0 Charging current compensation factor 0...

Страница 616: ...A28F Selector 1 Bit Acknowledge 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A291 Selector 1 Power Up Mode 0 to 2 1 F084 0 Restore A292 Selector 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset A293 Selector 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled A294 Reserved 10 items 1 F001 0 A29E Repeated for Selector 2 Digital Counter Read Write Setting 8 Modules A300 Digital Counter 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled A301 Digital Counter 1 Name ...

Страница 617: ...rite 32 Modules AA00 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog 1 default value 1000000 to 1000000 0 001 F060 1000 AA02 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 mode 0 to 1 1 F491 0 Default Value AA03 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 units F207 none AA05 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 per unit base 0 to 999999999 999 0 001 F060 1 AA07 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 2 AA0E Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 3 AA...

Страница 618: ...items 0 to 65534 1 F206 none ACB0 IEC 61850 logical node PDISx name prefix 10 items 0 to 65534 1 F206 none ACCE IEC 61850 logical node RBRFx name prefix 24 items 0 to 65534 1 F206 none AD16 IEC 61850 logical node RPSBx name prefix 0 to 65534 1 F206 none AD19 IEC 61850 logical node RRECx name prefix 6 items 0 to 65534 1 F206 none AD2B IEC 61850 logical node MMXUx name prefix 6 items 0 to 65534 1 F2...

Страница 619: ...nalog input 31 AFE9 Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 32 IEC 61850 GOOSE GSSE Configuration Read Write Setting B01C Default GOOSE GSSE Update Time 1 to 60 s 1 F001 60 B01D IEC 61850 GSSE Function GsEna 0 to 1 1 F102 1 Enabled B013 IEC 61850 GSSE ID F209 GSSEOut B03F IEC 61850 GOOSE Function GoEna 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled B040 IEC 61850 GSSE Destination MAC Address F072 0 B043 IEC 61850 Sta...

Страница 620: ...100 0 001 F003 10000 B0EA IEC 61850 MMXU VA phsA Deadband 1 0 001 to 100 0 001 F003 10000 B0EC IEC 61850 MMXU VA phsB Deadband 1 0 001 to 100 0 001 F003 10000 B0EE IEC 61850 MMXU VA phsC Deadband 1 0 001 to 100 0 001 F003 10000 B0F0 IEC 61850 MMXU PF phsA Deadband 1 0 001 to 100 0 001 F003 10000 B0F2 IEC 61850 MMXU PF phsB Deadband 1 0 001 to 100 0 001 F003 10000 B0F4 IEC 61850 MMXU PF phsC Deadba...

Страница 621: ...o 5 1 F236 0 Definite Time B30B Wattmetric ground fault 1 multiplier 0 01 to 2 s 0 01 F001 100 B30C Wattmetric ground fault 1 block 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 B30E Wattmetric ground fault 1 target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset B30F Wattmetric ground fault 1 events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled B310 Wattmetric ground fault 1 reference power 0 001 to 1 2 pu 0 001 F001 500 B311 Wattmetric ground fault x Reserved 0 ...

Страница 622: ...B5C7 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ETYPE APPID 0 to 16383 1 F001 0 B5C8 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ConfRev 1 to 4294967295 1 F003 1 B5CA IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Retransmission Curve 0 to 3 1 F611 3 Relaxed B5CB Configurable GOOSE dataset items for transmission 64 items 0 to 1008 1 F616 0 None B60B Repeated for Module 2 B676 Repeated for Module 3 B6E1 Repeated for Module 4 B74C Repeated for M...

Страница 623: ...0 Repeated for Contact Input 25 BBC8 Repeated for Contact Input 26 BBD0 Repeated for Contact Input 27 BBD8 Repeated for Contact Input 28 BBE0 Repeated for Contact Input 29 BBE8 Repeated for Contact Input 30 BBF0 Repeated for Contact Input 31 BBF8 Repeated for Contact Input 32 BC00 Repeated for Contact Input 33 BC08 Repeated for Contact Input 34 BC10 Repeated for Contact Input 35 BC18 Repeated for ...

Страница 624: ... BD80 Repeated for Contact Input 81 BD88 Repeated for Contact Input 82 BD90 Repeated for Contact Input 83 BD98 Repeated for Contact Input 84 BDA0 Repeated for Contact Input 85 BDA8 Repeated for Contact Input 86 BDB0 Repeated for Contact Input 87 BDB8 Repeated for Contact Input 88 BDC0 Repeated for Contact Input 89 BDC8 Repeated for Contact Input 90 BDD0 Repeated for Contact Input 91 BDD8 Repeated ...

Страница 625: ...d for Virtual Input 30 BF98 Repeated for Virtual Input 31 BFA4 Repeated for Virtual Input 32 BFB0 Repeated for Virtual Input 33 BFBC Repeated for Virtual Input 34 BFC8 Repeated for Virtual Input 35 BFD4 Repeated for Virtual Input 36 BFE0 Repeated for Virtual Input 37 BFEC Repeated for Virtual Input 38 BFF8 Repeated for Virtual Input 39 C004 Repeated for Virtual Input 40 C010 Repeated for Virtual I...

Страница 626: ...ted for Virtual Output 17 C1B8 Repeated for Virtual Output 18 C1C0 Repeated for Virtual Output 19 C1C8 Repeated for Virtual Output 20 C1D0 Repeated for Virtual Output 21 C1D8 Repeated for Virtual Output 22 C1E0 Repeated for Virtual Output 23 C1E8 Repeated for Virtual Output 24 C1F0 Repeated for Virtual Output 25 C1F8 Repeated for Virtual Output 26 C200 Repeated for Virtual Output 27 C208 Repeated ...

Страница 627: ...Output 71 C368 Repeated for Virtual Output 72 C370 Repeated for Virtual Output 73 C378 Repeated for Virtual Output 74 C380 Repeated for Virtual Output 75 C388 Repeated for Virtual Output 76 C390 Repeated for Virtual Output 77 C398 Repeated for Virtual Output 78 C3A0 Repeated for Virtual Output 79 C3A8 Repeated for Virtual Output 80 C3B0 Repeated for Virtual Output 81 C3B8 Repeated for Virtual Outp...

Страница 628: ... Modules C600 Direct Output 1 Operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 C602 Direct Output 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled C603 Repeated for Direct Output 2 C606 Repeated for Direct Output 3 C609 Repeated for Direct Output 4 C60C Repeated for Direct Output 5 C60F Repeated for Direct Output 6 C612 Repeated for Direct Output 7 C615 Repeated for Direct Output 8 C618 Repeated for Direct Output 9 C61B Repeate...

Страница 629: ...ommands Read Write Command C888 Direct input output clear counters command 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No Direct inputs Read Write Setting 32 Modules C890 Direct Input 1 Device Number 0 to 16 1 F001 0 C891 Direct Input 1 Number 0 to 96 1 F001 0 C892 Direct Input 1 Default State 0 to 3 1 F086 0 Off C893 Direct Input 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled C894 Repeated for Direct Input 2 C898 Repeated for Direct Inp...

Страница 630: ...es Alarm Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled CAE4 Reserved 4 items 1 to 1000 1 F001 10 CAE8 Direct IO Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled CAE9 Direct I O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Msg Count 100 to 10000 1 F001 600 CAEA Direct I O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Threshold 1 to 1000 1 F001 10 CAEB Direct I O Channel 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disa...

Страница 631: ... Input 11 D00E Repeated for Remote Input 12 D018 Repeated for Remote Input 13 D022 Repeated for Remote Input 14 D02C Repeated for Remote Input 15 D036 Repeated for Remote Input 16 D040 Repeated for Remote Input 17 D04A Repeated for Remote Input 18 D054 Repeated for Remote Input 19 D05E Repeated for Remote Input 20 D068 Repeated for Remote Input 21 D072 Repeated for Remote Input 22 D07C Repeated fo...

Страница 632: ...rand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 D222 Remote Output DNA 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled D223 Reserved 0 to 1 1 F001 0 D224 Repeated for Remote Output 2 D228 Repeated for Remote Output 3 D22C Repeated for Remote Output 4 D230 Repeated for Remote Output 5 D234 Repeated for Remote Output 6 D238 Repeated for Remote Output 7 D23C Repeated for Remote Output 8 D240 Repeated for Remote Output 9 D244 Repeat...

Страница 633: ... for Remote Output 23 D2FC Repeated for Remote Output 24 D300 Repeated for Remote Output 25 D304 Repeated for Remote Output 26 D308 Repeated for Remote Output 27 D30C Repeated for Remote Output 28 D310 Repeated for Remote Output 29 D314 Repeated for Remote Output 30 D318 Repeated for Remote Output 31 D31C Repeated for Remote Output 32 IEC 61850 GGIO2 Control Configuration Read Write Setting 64 Mod...

Страница 634: ...01 1 D347 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO40 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D348 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO41 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D349 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO42 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D34A IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO43 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D34B IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO44 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D34C IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO45 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D34D IEC 61850 GG...

Страница 635: ...emote Device 28 D3D0 Repeated for Remote Device 29 D3D4 Repeated for Remote Device 30 D3D8 Repeated for Remote Device 31 D3DC Repeated for Remote Device 32 Contact Outputs Read Write Setting 64 Modules D3E0 Contact Output 1 Name F205 Cont Op 1 D3E6 Contact Output 1 Operation 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 D3E8 Contact Output 1 Seal In 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 D3EA Latching Output 1 Reset 0 to 4294967295...

Страница 636: ... D647 Repeated for Contact Output 42 D656 Repeated for Contact Output 43 D665 Repeated for Contact Output 44 D674 Repeated for Contact Output 45 D683 Repeated for Contact Output 46 D692 Repeated for Contact Output 47 D6A1 Repeated for Contact Output 48 D6B0 Repeated for Contact Output 49 D6BF Repeated for Contact Output 50 D6CE Repeated for Contact Output 51 D6DD Repeated for Contact Output 52 D6E...

Страница 637: ...unction 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled DC71 Synchrocheck 1 V1 Source 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 DC72 Synchrocheck 1 V2 Source 0 to 5 1 F167 1 SRC 2 DC73 Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Voltage Difference 0 to 400000 V 1 F060 10000 DC75 Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Angle Difference 0 to 100 degrees 1 F001 30 DC76 Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Frequency Difference 0 to 2 Hz 0 01 F001 100 DC77 Synchrocheck 1 Dead Source Select 0 to ...

Страница 638: ...r negative values indicate leading F050 UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00 00 00 January 1 1970 F051 UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format alternate format for F050 First 16 bits are Month Day MM DD xxxx Month 1 January 2 February 12 December Day 1 to 31 in steps of 1 Last 16 bits are Year xx xx YYYY 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1 F052 UR_UINT32 TI...

Страница 639: ...Definite Time 1 Inverse Time F112 ENUMERATION RS485 BAUD RATES F113 ENUMERATION PARITY 0 None 1 Odd 2 Even F114 ENUMERATION IRIG B SIGNAL TYPE 0 None 1 DC Shift 2 Amplitude Modulated F116 ENUMERATION NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE CURVES 0 Definite Time 1 FlexCurve A 2 FlexCurve B 3 FlexCurve C F118 ENUMERATION OSCILLOGRAPHY MODE 0 Automatic Overwrite 1 Protected value scheme 0 2TL TR SPC 2FC 1 2TL BL SPC 2F...

Страница 640: ...utral Time Overcurrent 4 52 Neutral Time Overcurrent 5 53 Neutral Time Overcurrent 6 56 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 57 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 2 60 Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 61 Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 2 64 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 65 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 66 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 3 67 Ground Instantaneous Overcurre...

Страница 641: ...hbutton 6 396 Control pushbutton 7 400 FlexElement 1 401 FlexElement 2 402 FlexElement 3 403 FlexElement 4 404 FlexElement 5 405 FlexElement 6 406 FlexElemen 7 407 FlexElement 8 Bitmask Element 420 Non volatile Latch 1 421 Non volatile Latch 2 422 Non volatile Latch 3 423 Non volatile Latch 4 424 Non volatile Latch 5 425 Non volatile Latch 6 426 Non volatile Latch 7 427 Non volatile Latch 8 428 No...

Страница 642: ...878 RTD Input 30 879 RTD Input 31 880 RTD Input 32 881 RTD Input 33 882 RTD Input 34 883 RTD Input 35 884 RTD Input 36 885 RTD Input 37 886 RTD Input 38 887 RTD Input 39 888 RTD Input 40 889 RTD Input 41 890 RTD Input 42 891 RTD Input 43 892 RTD Input 44 893 RTD Input 45 894 RTD Input 46 895 RTD Input 47 896 RTD Input 48 900 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 901 User Programmable Pushbutton 2 902 Use...

Страница 643: ...ask Element Bitmask Error 0 Any Self Tests 1 IRIG B Failure 2 Port 1 Offline 3 Port 2 Offline 4 Port 3 Offline 5 Port 4 Offline 6 Port 5 Offline 7 Port 6 Offline 8 RRTD Communications Failure 9 Voltage Monitor 10 FlexLogic Error Token 11 Equipment Mismatch 12 Process Bus Failure 13 Unit Not Programmed 14 System Exception 15 Latching Output Discrepancy 17 Maintenance Alert 01 18 SNTP Failure 19 Mai...

Страница 644: ...edia Alarm 99 Wrong Transceiver 100 Power Supply Warning Bitmask Definition 0 Events Cleared 1 Oscillography Triggered 2 Date time Changed 3 Default Settings Loaded 4 Test Mode Forcing On 5 Test Mode Forcing Off 6 Power On 7 Power Off 8 Relay In Service 9 Relay Out Of Service 10 Watchdog Reset 11 Oscillography Clear 12 Reboot Command 13 Led Test Initiated 14 Flash Programming Bitmask Error 15 Faul...

Страница 645: ...E 35 UserSt 3 1 DNA 1 36 UserSt 4 2 DNA 2 37 UserSt 5 3 DNA 3 38 UserSt 6 4 DNA 4 39 UserSt 7 5 DNA 5 40 UserSt 8 6 DNA 6 41 UserSt 9 7 DNA 7 42 UserSt 10 8 DNA 8 43 UserSt 11 9 DNA 9 44 UserSt 12 10 DNA 10 45 UserSt 13 11 DNA 11 46 UserSt 14 12 DNA 12 47 UserSt 15 13 DNA 13 48 UserSt 16 14 DNA 14 49 UserSt 17 15 DNA 15 50 UserSt 18 16 DNA 16 51 UserSt 19 17 DNA 17 52 UserSt 20 18 DNA 18 53 UserSt...

Страница 646: ...DV2 5 DV1 and DV2 Bitmask Definition 0 Off 1 8 samples cycle 2 16 samples cycle 3 32 samples cycle 4 64 samples cycle Value GOOSE dataset 0 Off 1 GooseIn 1 2 GooseIn 2 3 GooseIn 3 4 GooseIn 4 5 GooseIn 5 6 GooseIn 6 7 GooseIn 7 8 GooseIn 8 9 GooseIn 9 10 GooseIn 10 11 GooseIn 11 12 GooseIn 12 13 GooseIn 13 14 GooseIn 14 15 GooseIn 15 16 GooseIn 16 Bitmask Keypress Bitmask Keypress 0 use between re...

Страница 647: ...tW mag f 258 MMXU1 MX TotVAr mag f 259 MMXU1 MX TotVA mag f 260 MMXU1 MX TotPF mag f 261 MMXU1 MX Hz mag f 262 MMXU1 MX PPV phsAB cVal mag f 263 MMXU1 MX PPV phsAB cVal ang f 264 MMXU1 MX PPV phsBC cVal mag f 265 MMXU1 MX PPV phsBC cVal ang f 266 MMXU1 MX PPV phsCA cVal mag f 267 MMXU1 MX PPV phsCA cVal ang f 268 MMXU1 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 269 MMXU1 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 270 MMXU1 MX PhV phsB c...

Страница 648: ...MMXU3 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 348 MMXU3 MX A phsA cVal mag f 349 MMXU3 MX A phsA cVal ang f 350 MMXU3 MX A phsB cVal mag f Value GOOSE dataset item 351 MMXU3 MX A phsB cVal ang f 352 MMXU3 MX A phsC cVal mag f 353 MMXU3 MX A phsC cVal ang f 354 MMXU3 MX A neut cVal mag f 355 MMXU3 MX A neut cVal ang f 356 MMXU3 MX W phsA cVal mag f 357 MMXU3 MX W phsB cVal mag f 358 MMXU3 MX W phsC cVal mag f 359 M...

Страница 649: ...U6 MX PPV phsCA cVal mag f 452 MMXU6 MX PPV phsCA cVal ang f 453 MMXU6 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 454 MMXU6 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 455 MMXU6 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 456 MMXU6 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f Value GOOSE dataset item 457 MMXU6 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 458 MMXU6 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 459 MMXU6 MX A phsA cVal mag f 460 MMXU6 MX A phsA cVal ang f 461 MMXU6 MX A phsB cVal mag f 462 MMXU6 MX A phsB cVa...

Страница 650: ...3 MX AnIn5 mag f 134 GGIO3 MX AnIn6 mag f Value GOOSE dataset item 135 GGIO3 MX AnIn7 mag f 136 GGIO3 MX AnIn8 mag f 137 GGIO3 MX AnIn9 mag f 138 GGIO3 MX AnIn10 mag f 139 GGIO3 MX AnIn11 mag f 140 GGIO3 MX AnIn12 mag f 141 GGIO3 MX AnIn13 mag f 142 GGIO3 MX AnIn14 mag f 143 GGIO3 MX AnIn15 mag f 144 GGIO3 MX AnIn16 mag f 145 GGIO3 MX AnIn17 mag f 146 GGIO3 MX AnIn18 mag f 147 GGIO3 MX AnIn19 mag ...

Страница 651: ... and D represents bits for the descriptor The values in square brackets indicate the base type with P prefix PTTTTTTT and the values in round brackets indicate the descrip tor range The right most T bit indicates whether the type is an ON or OFF type There can be a total of 64 types plus protection ele ments There can be a total of 256 descriptors of each type 0 Off 0 this is boolean FALSE value 1...

Страница 652: ...put output state with bits 0 MSB to 15 LSB corresponding to input output state 1 to 16 The second reg ister indicates input output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input output state 17 to 32 if required The third register indicates input output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input output state 33 to 48 if required The fourth register indicates input out put state with bits 0 to ...

Страница 653: ...CURITY 0 First Coincidence 1 Enhanced F550 ENUMERATION RTD INPUT APPLICATION Bitmask Default variation 0 1 1 2 2 5 3 6 Bitmask Default variation 0 1 1 2 2 9 3 10 Bitmask Default variation 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 7 Valu e Keypress Valu e Keypress Valu e Keypress 0 None 15 3 33 User PB 3 1 Menu 16 Enter 34 User PB 4 2 Message Up 17 Message Down 35 User PB 5 3 7 18 0 36 User PB 6 4 8 19 Decimal 37 User...

Страница 654: ...ERATION GOOSE RETRANSMISSION SCHEME Enumeration RTD trip voting 0 None 1 Group 2 RTD Input 1 3 RTD Input 2 4 RTD Input 3 5 RTD Input 4 6 RTD Input 5 7 RTD Input 6 8 RTD Input 7 9 RTD Input 8 10 RTD Input 9 11 RTD Input 10 12 RTD Input 11 13 RTD Input 12 Enumeration RTD open 0 None 1 Alarm 2 Block Enumeration COM2 port usage 0 RS485 1 RRTD 2 GPM F 3 RRTD and GPM F Enumeration Remote DPS input statu...

Страница 655: ...neral 39 PIOC6 ST Str general 40 PIOC6 ST Op general 41 PIOC7 ST Str general 42 PIOC7 ST Op general 43 PIOC8 ST Str general 44 PIOC8 ST Op general 45 PIOC9 ST Str general 46 PIOC9 ST Op general 47 PIOC10 ST Str general 48 PIOC10 ST Op general 49 PIOC11 ST Str general 50 PIOC11 ST Op general 51 PIOC12 ST Str general 52 PIOC12 ST Op general 53 PIOC13 ST Str general 54 PIOC13 ST Op general 55 PIOC14 ...

Страница 656: ...ral 145 PIOC59 ST Str general 146 PIOC59 ST Op general 147 PIOC60 ST Str general 148 PIOC60 ST Op general Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 149 PIOC61 ST Str general 150 PIOC61 ST Op general 151 PIOC62 ST Str general 152 PIOC62 ST Op general 153 PIOC63 ST Str general 154 PIOC63 ST Op general 155 PIOC64 ST Str general 156 PIOC64 ST Op general 157 PIOC65 ST Str general 158 PIOC65 ST Op gene...

Страница 657: ...l 252 PTRC6 ST Op general 253 PTUV1 ST Str general 254 PTUV1 ST Op general Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 255 PTUV2 ST Str general 256 PTUV2 ST Op general 257 PTUV3 ST Str general 258 PTUV3 ST Op general 259 PTUV4 ST Str general 260 PTUV4 ST Op general 261 PTUV5 ST Str general 262 PTUV5 ST Op general 263 PTUV6 ST Str general 264 PTUV6 ST Op general 265 PTUV7 ST Str general 266 PTUV7 ST...

Страница 658: ... Pos stVal 355 CSWI5 ST Loc stVal 356 CSWI5 ST Pos stVal 357 CSWI6 ST Loc stVal 358 CSWI6 ST Pos stVal 359 CSWI7 ST Loc stVal 360 CSWI7 ST Pos stVal Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 361 CSWI8 ST Loc stVal 362 CSWI8 ST Pos stVal 363 CSWI9 ST Loc stVal 364 CSWI9 ST Pos stVal 365 CSWI10 ST Loc stVal 366 CSWI10 ST Pos stVal 367 CSWI11 ST Loc stVal 368 CSWI11 ST Pos stVal 369 CSWI12 ST Loc st...

Страница 659: ... ST Ind57 stVal 464 GGIO1 ST Ind58 stVal 465 GGIO1 ST Ind59 stVal 466 GGIO1 ST Ind60 stVal Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 467 GGIO1 ST Ind61 stVal 468 GGIO1 ST Ind62 stVal 469 GGIO1 ST Ind63 stVal 470 GGIO1 ST Ind64 stVal 471 GGIO1 ST Ind65 stVal 472 GGIO1 ST Ind66 stVal 473 GGIO1 ST Ind67 stVal 474 GGIO1 ST Ind68 stVal 475 GGIO1 ST Ind69 stVal 476 GGIO1 ST Ind70 stVal 477 GGIO1 ST Ind...

Страница 660: ...571 MMXU1 MX PF phsC cVal mag f 572 MMXU2 MX TotW mag f Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 573 MMXU2 MX TotVAr mag f 574 MMXU2 MX TotVA mag f 575 MMXU2 MX TotPF mag f 576 MMXU2 MX Hz mag f 577 MMXU2 MX PPV phsAB cVal mag f 578 MMXU2 MX PPV phsAB cVal ang f 579 MMXU2 MX PPV phsBC cVal mag f 580 MMXU2 MX PPV phsBC cVal ang f 581 MMXU2 MX PPV phsCA cVal mag f 582 MMXU2 MX PPV phsCA cVal ang f...

Страница 661: ...cVal mag f 676 MMXU4 MX VAr phsC cVal mag f 677 MMXU4 MX VA phsA cVal mag f 678 MMXU4 MX VA phsB cVal mag f Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 679 MMXU4 MX VA phsC cVal mag f 680 MMXU4 MX PF phsA cVal mag f 681 MMXU4 MX PF phsB cVal mag f 682 MMXU4 MX PF phsC cVal mag f 683 MMXU5 MX TotW mag f 684 MMXU5 MX TotVAr mag f 685 MMXU5 MX TotVA mag f 686 MMXU5 MX TotPF mag f 687 MMXU5 MX Hz mag f...

Страница 662: ...O4 MX AnIn20 mag f 777 GGIO4 MX AnIn21 mag f 778 GGIO4 MX AnIn22 mag f 779 GGIO4 MX AnIn23 mag f 780 GGIO4 MX AnIn24 mag f 781 GGIO4 MX AnIn25 mag f 782 GGIO4 MX AnIn26 mag f 783 GGIO4 MX AnIn27 mag f 784 GGIO4 MX AnIn28 mag f Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 785 GGIO4 MX AnIn29 mag f 786 GGIO4 MX AnIn30 mag f 787 GGIO4 MX AnIn31 mag f 788 GGIO4 MX AnIn32 mag f 789 XSWI1 ST Loc stVal 790...

Страница 663: ...nd17 q 34 GGIO1 ST Ind17 stVal 35 GGIO1 ST Ind18 q 36 GGIO1 ST Ind18 stVal Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 37 GGIO1 ST Ind19 q 38 GGIO1 ST Ind19 stVal 39 GGIO1 ST Ind20 q 40 GGIO1 ST Ind20 stVal 41 GGIO1 ST Ind21 q 42 GGIO1 ST Ind21 stVal 43 GGIO1 ST Ind22 q 44 GGIO1 ST Ind22 stVal 45 GGIO1 ST Ind23 q 46 GGIO1 ST Ind23 stVal 47 GGIO1 ST Ind24 q 48 GGIO1 ST Ind24 stVal 49 GGIO1 ST Ind25 ...

Страница 664: ... ST Ind69 stVal 139 GGIO1 ST Ind70 q 140 GGIO1 ST Ind70 stVal 141 GGIO1 ST Ind71 q 142 GGIO1 ST Ind71 stVal Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 143 GGIO1 ST Ind72 q 144 GGIO1 ST Ind72 stVal 145 GGIO1 ST Ind73 q 146 GGIO1 ST Ind73 stVal 147 GGIO1 ST Ind74 q 148 GGIO1 ST Ind74 stVal 149 GGIO1 ST Ind75 q 150 GGIO1 ST Ind75 stVal 151 GGIO1 ST Ind76 q 152 GGIO1 ST Ind76 stVal 153 GGIO1 ST Ind77 q 154 GGIO1...

Страница 665: ...1 ST Ind125 q 250 GGIO1 ST Ind125 stVal 251 GGIO1 ST Ind126 q 252 GGIO1 ST Ind126 stVal 253 GGIO1 ST Ind127 q 254 GGIO1 ST Ind127 stVal 255 GGIO1 ST Ind128 q 256 GGIO1 ST Ind128 stVal 257 MMXU1 MX TotW mag f 258 MMXU1 MX TotVAr mag f 259 MMXU1 MX TotVA mag f 260 MMXU1 MX TotPF mag f 261 MMXU1 MX Hz mag f 262 MMXU1 MX PPV phsAB cVal mag f 263 MMXU1 MX PPV phsAB cVal ang f 264 MMXU1 MX PPV phsBC cVa...

Страница 666: ...351 MMXU3 MX A phsB cVal ang f 352 MMXU3 MX A phsC cVal mag f 353 MMXU3 MX A phsC cVal ang f 354 MMXU3 MX A neut cVal mag f Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 355 MMXU3 MX A neut cVal ang f 356 MMXU3 MX W phsA cVal mag f 357 MMXU3 MX W phsB cVal mag f 358 MMXU3 MX W phsC cVal mag f 359 MMXU3 MX VAr phsA cVal mag f 360 MMXU3 MX VAr phsB cVal mag f 361 MMXU3 MX VAr phsC cVal mag f 362 MMXU3 MX VA phsA ...

Страница 667: ... phsA cVal ang f 455 MMXU6 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 456 MMXU6 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 457 MMXU6 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 458 MMXU6 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 459 MMXU6 MX A phsA cVal mag f 460 MMXU6 MX A phsA cVal ang f Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 461 MMXU6 MX A phsB cVal mag f 462 MMXU6 MX A phsB cVal ang f 463 MMXU6 MX A phsC cVal mag f 464 MMXU6 MX A phsC cVal ang f 465 MMXU6 MX A neut cVal mag f 46...

Страница 668: ...Op general 563 PDIS7 ST Str general 564 PDIS7 ST Op general 565 PDIS8 ST Str general 566 PDIS8 ST Op general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 567 PDIS9 ST Str general 568 PDIS9 ST Op general 569 PDIS10 ST Str general 570 PDIS10 ST Op general 571 PIOC1 ST Str general 572 PIOC1 ST Op general 573 PIOC2 ST Str general 574 PIOC2 ST Op general 575 PIOC3 ST Str general 576 PIOC3 ST Op general 577 PIOC4 ST...

Страница 669: ...ST Op general 669 PIOC50 ST Str general 670 PIOC50 ST Op general 671 PIOC51 ST Str general 672 PIOC51 ST Op general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 673 PIOC52 ST Str general 674 PIOC52 ST Op general 675 PIOC53 ST Str general 676 PIOC53 ST Op general 677 PIOC54 ST Str general 678 PIOC54 ST Op general 679 PIOC55 ST Str general 680 PIOC55 ST Op general 681 PIOC56 ST Str general 682 PIOC56 ST Op gener...

Страница 670: ...V6 ST Op general 775 PTOV7 ST Str general 776 PTOV7 ST Op general 777 PTOV8 ST Str general 778 PTOV8 ST Op general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 779 PTOV9 ST Str general 780 PTOV9 ST Op general 781 PTOV10 ST Str general 782 PTOV10 ST Op general 783 PTRC1 ST Tr general 784 PTRC1 ST Op general 785 PTRC2 ST Tr general 786 PTRC2 ST Op general 787 PTRC3 ST Tr general 788 PTRC3 ST Op general 789 PTRC4...

Страница 671: ...878 RREC1 ST AutoRecSt stVal 879 RREC2 ST Op general 880 RREC2 ST AutoRecSt stVal 881 RREC3 ST Op general 882 RREC3 ST AutoRecSt stVal 883 RREC4 ST Op general 884 RREC4 ST AutoRecSt stVal Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 885 RREC5 ST Op general 886 RREC5 ST AutoRecSt stVal 887 RREC6 ST Op general 888 RREC6 ST AutoRecSt stVal 889 CSWI1 ST Loc stVal 890 CSWI1 ST Pos stVal 891 CSWI2 ST Loc stVal 892 C...

Страница 672: ...oc stVal 966 XSWI9 ST Pos stVal 967 XSWI10 ST Loc stVal 968 XSWI10 ST Pos stVal 969 XSWI11 ST Loc stVal 970 XSWI11 ST Pos stVal 971 XSWI12 ST Loc stVal 972 XSWI12 ST Pos stVal 973 XSWI13 ST Loc stVal 974 XSWI13 ST Pos stVal 975 XSWI14 ST Loc stVal 976 XSWI14 ST Pos stVal 977 XSWI15 ST Loc stVal 978 XSWI15 ST Pos stVal 979 XSWI16 ST Loc stVal 980 XSWI16 ST Pos stVal 981 XSWI17 ST Loc stVal 982 XSWI...

Страница 673: ...ENUMERATION IEC 103 ASDU TYPE 0 3 1 9 F631 ENUMERATION VIRTUAL INPUTS FOR IEC 103 Enumeration Mode 0 Mode 1 1 and 3 Pole 1 Mode 2 1 Pole 2 Mode 3 3 Pole A 3 Mode 4 3 Pole B Enumeration Item 0 None 1 PP IRIG B PTP SNTP 2 IRIG B PP PTP SNTP 3 PP PTP IRIG B SNTP Enumeration Item 0 None 1 Port 1 PTP Clock 2 Port 2 PTP Clock 3 Port 3 PTP Clock 4 IRIG B 5 SNTP Enumeration Item 0 Disabled 1 No Signal 2 C...

Страница 674: ...B 110 L60 Line Phase Comparison System GE Multilin B 4 MEMORY MAPPING APPENDIX B B ...

Страница 675: ...d that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set C 1 2 COMMUNICATION PROFILES IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification MMS at the upper application layer for transfer of real time data This protocol has been in existence for several of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN env...

Страница 676: ...y be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability reduces the chances of missing data state changes Unbuffered reporting should generally be used for local status display C 2 3 GGIO2 DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES The GGIO2 logical node is available to provide access to the L60 virtual inputs Virtual inputs are single point control binary values that can be written by clients They are generally used a...

Страница 677: ...or MMXU1 MX Hz frequency MMXU1 MX PPV phsAB phase AB voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PPV phsBC phase BC voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PPV phsCA Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsA phase AG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsB phase BG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsC phase CG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX A phsA phase A current magnitude ...

Страница 678: ... locator function The XCBR logical node is directly associated with the breaker control feature XCBR1 ST Loc This is the state of the XCBR1 local remote switch A setting is provided to assign a FlexLogic operand to determine the state When local mode is true IEC 61850 client commands will be rejected XCBR1 ST Opcnt This is an operation counter as defined in IEC 61850 Command settings are provided ...

Страница 679: ...me of the last change of either the value or quality flags of the data item To accomplish this functionality all IEC 61850 data items must be regularly scanned for data changes and the timestamp updated when a change is detected regardless of the connection status of any IEC 61850 cli ents For applications where there is no IEC 61850 client in use the IEC 61850 SERVER SCANNING setting can be pro g...

Страница 680: ...ection for greater than two minutes the connection will be aborted by the L60 This frees up the con nection to be used by other clients Therefore when using IEC 61850 reporting clients should configure report control block items such that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes 120000 ms This ensures that the L60 will not abort the connection If other MMS data is being polled o...

Страница 681: ...n two pre defined data structures named DNA and UserSt Each DNA and UserSt item is referred to as a bit pair GSSE messages are transmit ted in response to state changes in any of the data points contained in the message GSSE messages always contain the same number of DNA and UserSt bit pairs Depending the on the configuration only some of these bit pairs may have val ues that are of interest to re...

Страница 682: ...ed for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR series IEDs and devices from other manufacturers Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR series IEDs IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters all of which must be correct to achieve the successful transfer of data It is critical that the configured datasets ...

Страница 683: ...NICATION IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE GOOSE CONFIGURATION RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu Set ITEM 1 to GGIO3 ST Ind1 q to indicate quality flags for GGIO3 status indication 1 Set ITEM 2 to GGIO3 ST Ind1 stVal to indicate the status value for GGIO3 status indication 1 The reception dataset now contains a set of quality flags a single point stat...

Страница 684: ...configured to use an automated multicast MAC scheme If the L60 destination MAC address setting is not a valid multicast address that is the least significant bit of the first byte is not set the address used as the destina tion MAC will be the same as the local MAC address but with the multicast bit set Thus if the local MAC address is 00 A0 F4 01 02 03 then the destination MAC address will be 01 ...

Страница 685: ...uration process for IEC 61850 BDA Basic Data Attribute that is not structured DAI Instantiated Data Attribute DO Data Object type or instance depending on the context 842790A2 CDR Ethernet System configurator SCD file System specification tool SSD file System specification data ICD file 2 Process of creating ICD vendor 2 Creating ICD GE Multilin EnerVista UR Setup ICD file 1 IED UR series OR ICD f...

Страница 686: ...le SCD to set communication configuration parame ters that is required addresses reception GOOSE datasets IDs of incoming GOOSE datasets etc for the IED The IED configurator functionality is implemented in the GE Multilin EnerVista UR Setup software C 5 2 CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS Before creating an ICD file the user can customize the IEC 61850 related settings for the IED For example the IED...

Страница 687: ...ators we recommend configuring transmission GOOSE for GE Multilin IEDs before creating the ICD and strictly within EnerVista UR Setup software or the front panel display access through the Settings Product Setup Com munications IEC 61850 GSSE GOOSE Configuration Transmission Tx Configurable GOOSE menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup Configurable reception GOOSE which includes eight configurable dataset...

Страница 688: ...ess node contains the address parameters of the access point The GSE node provides the address element for stat ing the control block related address parameters where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the IED on which the control block is located and cbName is the name of the control block The IED node describes the pre configuration of an IED its access points the...

Страница 689: ... DataSet name Other DataSet elements FCDA fc doName daName IdInst prefix InClass InInst Other FCDA elements DOI name SDI name Val Text Other DOI elements GSEControl name datSet type confRev appID LN InType InClass prefix inst DataSet name FCDA IdInst prefix InClass InInst doName fc Other FCDA elements ReportControl name datSet intgPd rptID confRev buffered TrgOps dchg OptFields seqNum RptEnabled O...

Страница 690: ...SDO The attribute DA has a func tional constraint and can either have a basic type be an enumeration or a structure of a DAType The DAType is built from BDA elements defining the structure elements which again can be BDA elements of have a base type such as DA Figure C 5 ICD FILE STRUCTURE DATATYPETEMPLATES NODE 842798A1 CDR DataTypeTemplates LNodeType id InClass DO name type Other LNodeType eleme...

Страница 691: ... procedure is pretty much the same First a substation project must be created either as an empty template or with some system information by importing a system specification file SSD Then IEDs are added to the substation Since each IED is represented by its associated ICD the ICD files are imported into the substation project and the system configurator validates the ICD files during the importing...

Страница 692: ... file and its version and specifies options for the mapping of names to signals The Substation node describes the substation parameters Figure C 7 SCD FILE STRUCTURE SUBSTATION NODE 842791A1 CDR SCL Header id version revision toolID nameStructure IED Section IED 2 Communication IED Section IED 1 Substation Other IED Sections DataTypeTemplates 842792A1 CDR Substation EquipmentContainer VoltageLevel...

Страница 693: ...nectedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub network The Address node contains the address parameters of the access point The GSE node provides the address element for stat ing the control block related address parameters where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the IED on which the control block is located and cbName is the name of the control...

Страница 694: ...pdate the L60 with the new configuration from an SCD file with the EnerVista UR Setup software 1 Right click anywhere in the files panel and select the Import Contents From SCD File item 2 Select the saved SCD file and click Open 842794A1 CDR IED Section IED 1 AccessPoint name Server Authentication none LDevice inst LN0 InType InClass inst DataSet elements DOI elements Inputs GSEControl elements R...

Страница 695: ...n one GE Multilin IED defined in the SCD file the software prompt the user to save a UR series set tings file for each IED 4 After the URS file is created modify any settings if required 5 To update the relay with the new settings right click on the settings file in the settings tree and select the Write Set tings File to Device item 6 The software will prompt for the target device Select the targ...

Страница 696: ... SCSM IEC 61850 9 2 used B24 SCSM other GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL GSE B31 Publisher side O Yes B32 Subscriber side Yes TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLED VALUE MODEL SVC B41 Publisher side O B42 Subscriber side SERVICES SERVER PUBLISHER UR FAMILY IF SERVER SIDE B11 SUPPORTED M1 Logical device c2 Yes M2 Logical node c3 Yes M3 Data c4 Yes M4 Data set c5 Yes M5 Substitution O M6 Setting group control O REP...

Страница 697: ...set name M8 5 data reference M8 6 BufTm M8 7 IntgPd M8 8 GI Logging O M9 Log control O M9 1 IntgPd M10 Log O M11 Control M Yes IF GSE B31 32 IS SUPPORTED GOOSE O Yes M12 1 entryID M12 2 DataReflnc M13 GSSE O Yes IF SVC B41 B42 IS SUPPORTED M14 Multicast SVC O M15 Unicast SVC O M16 Time M Yes M17 File transfer O Yes SERVICES AA TP MC SERVER PUBLISHER UR FAMILY SERVER CLAUSE 7 S1 ServerDirectory TP ...

Страница 698: ...Yes S26 SetBRCBValues TP c6 Yes UNBUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK URCB S27 Report TP c6 Yes S27 1 data change dchg Yes S27 2 qchg change qchg S27 3 data update dupd S28 GetURCBValues TP c6 Yes S29 SetURCBValues TP c6 Yes LOGGING CLAUSE 17 LOG CONTROL BLOCK S30 GetLCBValues TP M S31 SetLCBValues TP M LOG S32 QueryLogByTime TP M S33 QueryLogByEntry TP M S34 GetLogStatusValues TP M GENERIC SUBSTATION E...

Страница 699: ...SendMSVMessage MC c10 S46 GetMSVCBValues TP O S47 SetMSVCBValues TP O UNICAST SVC S48 SendUSVMessage MC c10 S49 GetUSVCBValues TP O S50 SetUSVCBValues TP O CONTROL CLAUSE 20 S51 Select O Yes S52 SelectWithValue TP O S53 Cancel TP O Yes S54 Operate TP M Yes S55 Command Termination TP O S56 TimeActivated Operate TP O FILE TRANSFER CLAUSE 23 S57 GetFile TP M Yes S58 SetFile TP O S59 DeleteFile TP O S...

Страница 700: ...king A LOGICAL NODES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL ANCR Neutral current regulator ARCO Reactive power control ATCC Automatic tap changer controller AVCO Voltage control C LOGICAL NODES FOR CONTROL CALH Alarm handling CCGR Cooling group control CILO Interlocking CPOW Point on wave switching CSWI Switch controller Yes CSYN Synchronizer controller F LOGICAL NODES FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS FCNT Counter FCSD Curve...

Страница 701: ...es MSQI Sequence and imbalance Yes MSTA Metering statistics P LOGICAL NODES FOR PROTECTION FUNCTIONS PDIF Differential Yes PDIR Direction comparison PDIS Distance Yes PDOP Directional overpower PDUP Directional underpower PFRC Rate of change of frequency PHAR Harmonic restraint PHIZ Ground detector PIOC Instantaneous overcurrent Yes PMRI Motor restart inhibition PMSS Motor starting time supervisio...

Страница 702: ...erential measurements RPSB Power swing detection blocking Yes RREC Autoreclosing Yes RSYN Synchronism check or synchronizing S LOGICAL NODES FOR SENSORS AND MONITORING SARC Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs SCBR Circuit breaker supervision SIMG Insulation medium supervision gas SIML Insulation medium supervision liquid SLTC Tap changer supervision SOPM Supervision of operating mechanism SPDC Mon...

Страница 703: ...arth fault neutralizer Petersen coil YLTC Tap changer YPSH Power shunt YPTR Power transformer Z LOGICAL NODES FOR FURTHER POWER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT ZAXN Auxiliary network ZBAT Battery ZBSH Bushing ZCAB Power cable ZCAP Capacitor bank ZCON Converter ZGEN Generator ZGIL Gas insulated line ZLIN Power overhead line ZMOT Motor ZREA Reactor ZRES Resistor ZRRC Rotating reactive component ZSAR Surge arrestor...

Страница 704: ...C 30 L60 Line Phase Comparison System GE Multilin C 7 LOGICAL NODES APPENDIX C C ...

Страница 705: ...eroperability table Interoperability means that any required applica tion data in the device which can be coded into an IEC 60870 5 103 data type can be mapped into the IEC 60870 5 103 address space This data is recognized by any IEC 60870 5 103 master D 1 2 FACTOR AND OFFSET CALCULATION TO TRANSMIT MEASURAND The general formula for the transmitted value is Xt a X b where X is the measurand a is t...

Страница 706: ...LAYER Transmission mode for application data Mode 1 least significant octet first as defined in 4 10 of IEC 60870 5 4 is used exclusively in this companion stan dard Common address of ASDU One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU identical with station address More than one COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU Selection of standard information numbers in monitor direction System functions in monitor direction INF Semantics 0...

Страница 707: ...sequence supervision 36 Trip circuit supervision 37 I back up operation 38 VT fuse failure 39 Teleprotection disturbed 46 Group warning 47 Group alarm Earth fault indications in monitor direction INF Semantics 48 Earth fault L1 49 Earth fault L2 50 Earth fault L3 51 Earth fault forward meaning line 52 Earth fault reverse meaning busbar Fault indications in monitor direction INF Semantics 64 Start ...

Страница 708: ...p IN Auto reclosure indications in monitor direction INF Semantics 128 CB on by AR 129 CB on by long time AR 130 AR blocked Measurands in monitor direction INF Semantics 144 Measurand I 145 Measurands I V 146 Measurands I V P Q 147 Measurands IN VEN 148 Measurands IL123 VL123 P Q f Generic functions in monitor direction INF Semantics 240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read values or attri...

Страница 709: ...2 25 Activate characteristic 3 26 Activate characteristic 4 Generic functions in control direction INF Semantics 240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read values or attributes of all entries of one group 243 Read directory of a single entry 244 Read value or attribute of a single entry 245 General interrogation of generic data 248 Write entry 249 Write entry with confirmation 250 Write entr...

Страница 710: ...D 6 L60 Line Phase Comparison System GE Multilin D 1 IEC 60870 5 103 APPENDIX D D Voltage L3 E Active power P Reactive power Q Frequency f Voltage L1 L2 MEASURAND MAX MVAL TIMES RATED VALUE 1 2 OR 2 4 ...

Страница 711: ...it V 24 V 28 Recommended if 1200 bits s Balanced Interchange Circuit X 24 X 27 100 bits sec 200 bits sec 300 bits sec 600 bits sec 1200 bits sec 2400 bits sec 4800 bits sec 9600 bits sec 2400 bits sec 4800 bits sec 9600 bits sec 19200 bits sec 38400 bits sec 56000 bits sec 64000 bits sec Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V 24 V 28 Standard Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V 24 V 28 Recommended if 1200 ...

Страница 712: ... the following used in standard direction not used cannot be selected in IEC 60870 5 104 standard Process information in monitor direction 1 Single point information M_SP_NA_1 2 Single point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1 3 Double point information M_DP_NA_1 4 Double point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1 5 Step position information M_ST_NA_1 6 Step position information with time tag M_ST_...

Страница 713: ...protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TE_1 40 Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TF_1 45 Single command C_SC_NA_1 46 Double command C_DC_NA_1 47 Regulating step command C_RC_NA_1 48 Set point command normalized value C_SE_NA_1 49 Set point command scaled value C_SE_NB_1 50 Set point command short floating point value C_SE_NC_1 51 Bi...

Страница 714: ...tory select file call file call section F_SC_NA_1 123 Last section last segment F_LS_NA_1 124 Ack file ack section F_AF_NA_1 125 Segment F_SG_NA_1 126 Directory blank or X available only in monitor standard direction C_CD_NA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 1 M_SP_NA_1 X X X X X 2 M_SP_TA_1 3 M_DP_NA_1 4 M_DP_TA_1 5...

Страница 715: ...48 C_SE_NA_1 49 C_SE_NB_1 50 C_SE_NC_1 51 C_BO_NA_1 58 C_SC_TA_1 X X X X X 59 C_DC_TA_1 60 C_RC_TA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 PERIODIC CYCLIC BACKGROUND SCAN SPONTANEOUS INITIALIZED REQUEST OR REQUESTED ACTIVATION ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION DEACTIVATION DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION ACTIVATION TERMINATION RETURN INFO...

Страница 716: ...ME_NC_1 X X X 113 P_AC_NA_1 120 F_FR_NA_1 121 F_SR_NA_1 122 F_SC_NA_1 123 F_LS_NA_1 124 F_AF_NA_1 125 F_SG_NA_1 126 F_DR_TA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 PERIODIC CYCLIC BACKGROUND SCAN SPONTANEOUS INITIALIZED REQUEST OR REQUESTED ACTIVATION ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION DEACTIVATION DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION ACTIVATIO...

Страница 717: ...number M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_TC_1 and M_ME_TF_1 Station interrogation Clock synchronization Clock synchronization optional see Clause 7 6 Command transmission Direct command transmission Direct setpoint command transmission Select and execute command Select and execute setpoint command C_SE ACTTERM used No additional definition Short pulse duration duration determined by a system parameter in the outstat...

Страница 718: ...of events Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values File transfer in control direction Transparent file Background scan Background scan Acquisition of transmission delay Acquisition of transmission delay Definition of time outs Maximum range of values for all time outs 1 to 255 s accuracy 1 s Maximum number of outstanding I format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs w PARAMETER DEFAULT ...

Страница 719: ...determined by the Internet Architecture Board IAB It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Inter net The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen by the user of this standard Ethernet 802 3 Serial X 21 interface Other selection s from RFC 2200 list below if selected E 1 2 POINT LIST The IEC 60870 5 104 data points ...

Страница 720: ...E 10 L60 Line Phase Comparison System GE Multilin E 1 PROTOCOL APPENDIX E E ...

Страница 721: ...ed in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported the complete list is described in the attached table Binary Inputs Object 1 Binary Input Changes Object 2 Binary Outputs Object 10 Control Relay Output Block Object 12 Binary Counters Object 20 Frozen Counters Object 21 Counter Change Event Object 22 Frozen Counter Event Object 23 Analog Inputs Object 30 Analog Input Changes Object 32 Analog Deadb...

Страница 722: ...inary Outputs Never Always Sometimes Configurable SELECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Never Always Sometimes Configurable Count 1 Never Always Sometimes Configurable Pulse On Never Always Sometimes Configurable Pulse Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable Latch On Never Always Sometimes Configurable Latch Off ...

Страница 723: ...Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes attach explanation ENABLE DISABLE unsolicited Function codes supported Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change No other options are permitted Default Counter Object Variation No Counters Reported Configurable attach explanation Default Object 20 Default Variation 1 Point by point list attached Counte...

Страница 724: ...esp 17 28 index 3 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 10 0 Binary Output Status Variation 0 is used to request default variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 17 28 index 2 Binary Output Status 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 17 28 index 129 response 00 01 start stop 17 28 inde...

Страница 725: ... Variation 0 is used to request default variation 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 1 32 Bit Counter Change Event 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 2 16 Bit Counter Change Event 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 5 32 Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or a...

Страница 726: ...response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 3 32 Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 4 16 Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 5 short floating point Analog Change Event without Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129...

Страница 727: ...26 close 30 abort 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 5 File transfer 1 read 2 write 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 6 File transfer status 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 7 File descriptor 28 get file info 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 80 1 Internal Indications 1 read 00 01 start stop index 7 129 response 00 01...

Страница 728: ...formed on a binary counter point the frozen value is available in the corresponding frozen counter point BINARY INPUT POINTS Static Steady State Object Number 1 Change Event Object Number 2 Request Function Codes supported 1 read 22 assign class Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested 2 Binary Input with status Configurable Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested 2 ...

Страница 729: ...rtual Input 15 15 Virtual Input 16 16 Virtual Input 17 17 Virtual Input 18 18 Virtual Input 19 19 Virtual Input 20 20 Virtual Input 21 21 Virtual Input 22 22 Virtual Input 23 23 Virtual Input 24 24 Virtual Input 25 25 Virtual Input 26 26 Virtual Input 27 27 Virtual Input 28 28 Virtual Input 29 29 Virtual Input 30 30 Virtual Input 31 31 Virtual Input 32 32 Virtual Input 33 33 Virtual Input 34 34 Vi...

Страница 730: ...freeze and clear noack 22 assign class Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested 1 32 Bit Binary Counter with Flag Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested 1 32 Bit Counter Change Event without time Change Event Buffer Size 10 Default Class for all points 3 FROZEN COUNTERS Static Steady State Object Number 21 Change Event Object Number 23 Request Function Codes support...

Страница 731: ...og Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity For example an Analog Input quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bul letin 9809 001 Analog Input Reporting Deadband Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to data type Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set...

Страница 732: ...F 12 L60 Line Phase Comparison System GE Multilin F 2 DNP POINT LISTS APPENDIX F F ...

Страница 733: ...ser Tester with an Administrator role Tester User Password testpw GE PDC USER Role Administrator 4 In the clients conf file in the Path_to_Radius etc raddb folder add the following text to define the UR as a RADIUS client where the client IP address is 10 0 0 2 the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 the shared secret specified here is also configured on the UR device for successful authentication and th...

Страница 734: ... IP address and ports for the RADIUS server Leave the GE vendor ID field at the default of 2910 Update the RADIUS shared secret as specified in the clients conf file 9 Verify operation Log in to the UR software as follows In the login window select Server as the Authentication Type enter the user name entered for example user name Tester and password testpw Check that the RADIUS server log file sh...

Страница 735: ...1 February 2003 URL 104 1601 0082 D1 3 2x 11 February 2003 URL 107 1601 0082 E1 3 3x 01 May 2003 URX 080 1601 0082 E2 3 3x 29 May 2003 URX 083 1601 0082 K1 4 6x 15 March 2005 URX 176 1601 0082 L1 4 8x 05 August 2005 URX 202 1601 0082 M1 4 9x 15 December 2005 URX 208 1601 0082 M2 4 9x 27 February 2006 URX 214 1601 0082 N1 5 0x 31 March 2006 URX 217 1601 0082 N2 5 0x 26 May 2006 URX 220 1601 0082 P1...

Страница 736: ... section for Actual Values Metering Distance 8 Delete Deleted chapter 8 on security moving content to other chapters 10 Add Added Maintenance chapter moving content from other chapters and adding new instructions to replace the battery D Add Added new appendix on IEC 60870 5 103 interoperability Table H 4 MAJOR UPDATES FOR L60 MANUAL REVISION Z1 Sheet 1 of 2 PAGE Y3 PAGE Z1 CHANGE DESCRIPTION Add ...

Страница 737: ...ical Wiring Diagram 3 22 3 22 Update Deleted references to COM 1 RS485 port in section 3 2 8 CPU Communication Ports Revised text and Figure 3 23 CPU Module Communications Wiring to include only modules T U V in section 3 2 8a 5 1 5 1 Update Updated the front panel main menu to include the CyberSentry security menu 5 15 5 15 Update Update Communications main menu to remove the SNTP Protocol submen...

Страница 738: ...s 6 10 6 10 Delete Deleted section 6 2 19 Ethernet Switch 6 6 10 Add Added new section 6 2 20 Remaining Connection Status 7 7 1 Add Added Security command to the Commands main menu 7 7 3 Add Added Reboot Relay command and description to the Relay Maintenance menu items 7 7 Add Added Security menu and submenu commands and descriptions to the Command menu 7 7 Add Added to Minor self test error messa...

Страница 739: ...ector FDH Fault Detector high set FDL Fault Detector low set FLA Full Load Current FO Fiber Optic FREQ Frequency FSK Frequency Shift Keying FTP File Transfer Protocol FxE FlexElement FWD Forward G Generator GE General Electric GND Ground GNTR Generator GOOSE General Object Oriented Substation Event GPS Global Positioning System HARM Harmonic Harmonics HCT High Current Time HGF High Impedance Groun...

Страница 740: ...ote Terminal Unit RX Rx Receive Receiver s second S Sensitive SAT CT Saturation SBO Select Before Operate SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SEC Secondary SEL Select Selector Selection SENS Sensitive SEQ Sequence SIR Source Impedance Ratio SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SRC Source SSB Single Side Band SSEL Session Selector STATS Statistics SUPN Supervision SUPV Supervise Supervision...

Страница 741: ...f 1 October 2013 GE Digital Energy warrants most of its GE manufactured products for 10 years For warranty details including any limitations and disclaimers see the GE Digital Energy Terms and Conditions at https www gedigitalenergy com multilin warranty htm For products shipped before 1 October 2013 the standard 24 month warranty applies ...

Страница 742: ...H 8 L60 Line Phase Comparison System GE Multilin H 3 WARRANTY APPENDIX H H ...

Страница 743: ...5 295 specifications 2 18 AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands 5 120 logic 5 240 Modbus registers B 45 settings 5 240 specifications 2 17 AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands 5 121 logic 5 239 Modbus registers B 45 settings 5 239 specifications 2 17 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE CHANNEL 3 10 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING 6 17 AWG WIRE SIZE 3 10 3 29 3 32 3 34 B BANKS 5 7 5 98 5 99 BATTERY disposal 10 5 ...

Страница 744: ...on 3 10 specifications 2 23 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS FlexLogic operands 5 120 Modbus registers B 65 settings 5 78 specifications 2 19 COUNTERS actual values 6 6 settings 5 264 CRC ALARM 5 94 CRC 16 ALGORITHM B 2 CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY 2 22 3 9 CSA APPROVAL 2 26 CT BANKS settings 5 98 CT FAILURE FlexLogic operands 5 121 logic 5 275 settings 5 274 CT INPUTS 5 7 5 98 CT WIRING 3 11 CURRENT BANK 5 98 CURRE...

Страница 745: ...ce profile document F 1 frozen counters F 10 implementation table F 4 Modbus registers B 25 settings 5 37 E ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE 2 25 ELEMENTS 5 4 EMAIL ADDRESS FOR SUPPORT 1 2 ENERGY METERING specifications 2 20 ENERGY METERING CLEARING 7 2 ENERVISTA UR SETUP creating a site list 4 1 event recorder 4 2 firmware upgrades 4 2 installation 1 5 introduction 4 1 oscillography 4 2 overview 4 1 requi...

Страница 746: ...0 specifications 2 20 FREQUENCY OUT OF BAND ACCUMULATION Modbus registers B 24 FREQUENCY TRACKING 5 100 6 18 FREQUENCY NOMINAL 5 100 FUNCTION SETTING 5 4 FUSE 2 22 FUSE FAILURE see VT FUSE FAILURE G G 703 3 29 3 30 3 31 3 34 G 703 WIRE SIZE 3 29 GATEWAY ADDRESS 5 32 GE TYPE IAC CURVES 5 196 GROUND CURRENT METERING 6 16 GROUND DIRECTIONAL SUPERVISION 5 180 GROUND DISTANCE FlexLogic operands 5 122 o...

Страница 747: ...E pickup 5 161 LINE PICKUP FlexLogic operands 5 122 logic 5 162 Modbus registers B 41 settings 5 161 specifications 2 15 LINK POWER BUDGET 2 24 LOAD ENCROACHMENT FlexLogic operands 5 122 Modbus registers B 38 settings 5 191 5 192 specifications 2 18 LOCAL SETTING AUTHORIZATION 4 2 LOGIC GATES 5 129 LOGS SYSTEM 5 23 LOST PASSWORD 5 8 LV FAULT 9 4 M MAINTENANCE alert to replace battery 7 7 battery 1...

Страница 748: ...16 NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT see entry for NEUTRAL IOC NEUTRAL IOC FlexLogic operands 5 123 logic 5 205 Modbus registers B 33 settings 5 205 specifications 2 15 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands 5 123 logic 5 237 Modbus registers B 45 settings 5 237 specifications 2 17 NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT see entry for NEUTRAL TOC NEUTRAL TOC FlexLogic operands 5 123 logic 5 204 Modbus registers ...

Страница 749: ...se A polarization 5 201 settings 5 201 5 202 specifications 2 16 PHASE DISTANCE FlexLogic operands 5 123 logic 5 172 Modbus registers B 40 op scheme 5 171 settings 5 164 specifications 2 14 PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT see entry for PHASE IOC PHASE IOC FlexLogic operands 5 123 logic 5 200 specifications 2 15 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands 5 124 logic 5 236 Modbus registers B 40 settings 5...

Страница 750: ... settings 5 308 specifications 2 21 REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA 1 bit pair 5 309 Modbus registers B 68 B 69 UserSt 1 bit pair 5 310 REMOTE SETTING AUTHORIZATION 4 2 REPAIR H 7 REPLACEMENT MODULES 2 12 2 13 REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION 1 5 RESET TO FACTORY DEFAULTS 5 8 RESETTING 5 8 5 128 5 310 to factory defaults 5 8 REVISION HISTORY H 1 RF IMMUNITY 2 25 RFI CONDUCTED 2 25 RMS CURRENT 2 20 RMS VOLTAGE 2 2...

Страница 751: ...4 clearing counters 7 2 FlexLogic operands 5 126 logic 5 316 Modbus registers B 51 overview 5 314 settings 5 96 5 314 5 315 specifications 2 21 TEMPERATURE MONITOR 5 128 7 9 TERMINALS 3 7 TESTING force contact inputs 5 325 force contact outputs 5 326 lamp test 7 3 self test error messages 7 5 THD Modbus registers B 18 THEORY OF OPERATION 8 1 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION Modbus registers B 43 settin...

Страница 752: ...s 5 127 logic 5 303 Modbus registers B 9 B 60 settings 5 303 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS actual values 6 5 FlexLogic operands 5 127 Modbus registers B 62 settings 5 306 VOLTAGE BANKS 5 99 VOLTAGE DEVIATIONS 2 25 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5 234 VOLTAGE METERING Modbus registers B 15 specifications 2 20 values 6 16 VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC 5 198 VT FUSE FAILURE logic 5 277 Modbus registers B 51 settings 5 276 VT...

Отзывы:

Нет отзывов

Похожие инструкции для L60

Garmin GPSMAP 3205 - Marine GPS Receiver Quick Reference Manual preview
GPSMAP 3205 - Marine GPS Receiver
Бренд: Garmin Страницы: 2
Opvimus ME-200C Operating Instructions Manual preview
ME-200C
Бренд: Opvimus Страницы: 33
Panasonic SC-HC38DB Operating Instructions Manual preview
SC-HC38DB
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 24
Panasonic SC-HC55DB Operating Instructions Manual preview
SC-HC55DB
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 24
Panasonic SC-HC412 Operating Instructions Manual preview
SC-HC412
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 28
Panasonic SC-HC58DB Operating Instructions Manual preview
SC-HC58DB
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 32
Panasonic SC-HC37DB Operating Instructions Manual preview
SC-HC37DB
Бренд: Panasonic Страницы: 20
Sennheiser MKH 416 T Manual preview
MKH 416 T
Бренд: Sennheiser Страницы: 11
Audio Technica UniPlate AT871R Product Information preview
UniPlate AT871R
Бренд: Audio Technica Страницы: 2
Knoll WHD3 Installation Instructions preview
WHD3
Бренд: Knoll Страницы: 2
Earthworks SR69 User Manual preview
SR69
Бренд: Earthworks Страницы: 6
Philips FW-R33 Specifications preview
FW-R33
Бренд: Philips Страницы: 2
Philips FW-R55 Specifications preview
FW-R55
Бренд: Philips Страницы: 2
Philips FW-P75 Specifications preview
FW-P75
Бренд: Philips Страницы: 2
Philips FW-M589 Specifications preview
FW-M589
Бренд: Philips Страницы: 2
Philips FW-M567 Specifications preview
FW-M567
Бренд: Philips Страницы: 2
Philips FW-R17 Servise Manual preview
FW-R17
Бренд: Philips Страницы: 23
Philips FW-P750 User Manual preview
FW-P750
Бренд: Philips Страницы: 31

Бренды по названию

Популярные бренды

Загрузить еще бренды